Samsung Cell Phone ATT_SGH_i717_UM_English_MR_UCMD3_WC_041613_F3 User Guide

4 G  
L T E  
S M A R T P H O N E  
User Manual  
Please read this manual before operating your  
phone, and keep it for future reference.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF  
THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS  
OR BENEFITS.  
Modification of Software  
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS,  
OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE.  
USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY. YOUR  
CARRIER MAY NOT PERMIT USERS TO DOWNLOAD CERTAIN SOFTWARE, SUCH AS CUSTOM OS.  
Samsung Telecommunications America (STA), LLC  
Headquarters:  
1301 E. Lookout Drive  
Richardson, TX 75082  
Customer Care Center:  
1000 Klein Rd.  
Plano, TX 75074  
Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Internet Address:  
Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Phone? For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS  
System (Automated Response System) at: http://www.samsung.com/us/support  
Nuance®, VSuite™, T9® Text Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications,  
Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.  
The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are  
registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.  
microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.  
Openwave® is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.  
LTE is a trademark of ETSI.  
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Google Play, Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Music, Google Talk,  
Picasa, YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc.  
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.  
Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype, Inc. © 2010 Swype, Inc. All rights reserved.  
, DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under  
license.  
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX  
Certified® device that has passed rigorous testing to verify that it plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and  
software tools to convert your files into DivX videos.  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-  
Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your phone setup menu (tap Apps >  
Settings > About device > Legal information > License settings > DivX® VOD > Register). Go to vod.divx.com for more information on  
how to complete your registration.  
Devices purchased for use on AT&T's system are designed for use exclusively on AT&T's system. You agree that you won't make  
any modifications to the Equipment or programming to enable the Equipment to operate on any other system. A voice plan is  
required on all voice-capable devices, unless specifically noted otherwise in the terms governing your agreement. Some devices  
or plans may require you to subscribe to a data plan.  
Your phone is designed to make it easy for you to access a wide variety of content. For your protection, AT&T wants you to be  
aware that some applications that you enable may involve the location of your phone being shared. For applications available  
through AT&T, AT&T offers privacy controls that let you decide how an application may use the location of your phone and other  
phones on your account. However, AT&T's privacy tools do not apply to applications available outside of AT&T. Please review the  
terms and conditions and the associated privacy policy for each location-based service to learn how location information will be  
used and protected.  
Your phone may be used to access the Internet and to download, and/or purchase goods, applications, and services from AT&T or  
elsewhere from third parties. AT&T provides tools for you to control access to the Internet and certain Internet content. These  
controls may not be available for certain devices which bypass AT&T controls.  
AT&T may collect certain types of information from your device when you use AT&T services to provide customer support and to  
improve its services. For more information on AT&T's Privacy Policy, visit http://www.att.com/privacy  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your phone features earSmart™, an intelligent voice processor that delivers a clear voice experience, allowing  
you to hear and be heard™ in nearly any environment. earSmart technology uses the science of human  
hearing to distinguish sounds, identify your voice and suppress surrounding noise, for clear conversations just  
about anywhere.  
How Does It Work?  
The earSmart voice processor in your phone captures your voice and all the sounds around you.  
Working like the human ear, it processes and distinguishes these sounds, isolates your voice conversation, and removes background noise -  
from both ends of a call.  
It also automatically equalizes and adjusts voice volume so you can hear and talk naturally, even in the noisiest places.  
With earSmart technology, you can talk where you want, and have clear conversations for mobile calls, video chats, even speakerphone calls,  
without worrying about surrounding noise.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5: Contacts and Your Address  
Book ......................................................... 70  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 11: Health and Safety  
Section 13: Samsung Product  
Information .............................................192  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification  
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197  
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)  
Registration ............................................228  
Regulations for Wireless Devices . . . . . . . . .211  
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1: Getting Started  
This section explains how to start using your phone by first  
configuring your hardware, activating your service, and then  
setting up your Voicemail.  
2. Lift the cover up and away from the phone (2).  
Setting Up Your Phone  
Prior to use it is necessary to install both the battery and SIM  
into their corresponding internal compartments. The  
microSD™ card slot is also located in this same internal  
area.  
1. Remove the back cover by inserting a fingernail into  
the slot on the top side of your phone (1).  
Installing the SIM Card  
When you subscribe to a cellular network, you are provided  
with a plug-in SIM card loaded with your subscription details,  
such as your PIN, available optional services, and many  
others features.  
Important! The plug-in SIM card information and its contacts  
can be easily damaged by scratching or bending,  
so be careful when handling, inserting, or  
removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach  
of small children.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket  
(as shown) until the card locks into place.  
Installing and Removing the Memory Card  
Your phone lets you use a microSD(SD) or microSDHC  
card to expand available memory space. This secure digital  
card enables you to exchange images, music, and data  
between SD-compatible devices. This type of memory card  
is designed for use with this mobile phone and other devices.  
Make sure that the card’s gold contacts face into the phone  
and that the upper-left angled corner of the card is positioned  
as shown.  
Note: Your phone was tested to support up to a 32GB memory  
Incorrect  
card.  
1. Push the microSD card into the slot until it clicks.  
Make sure the microSD’s gold contact pins face downward and  
the card is securely inserted.  
Correct  
Incorrect  
Note: If the card is not inserted correctly, the phone will not  
detect the SIM card. Re-orient the card back into the slot  
if the SIM is not detected.  
Correct  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
           
2. To remove, push on the memory card until it clicks and  
is released. Then grasp the memory card and remove it  
from the phone.  
Installing the Back Cover  
1. Place the battery cover onto the back bottom of the  
phone (1) and press down (2).  
For more information on Memory Cards, see “Memory Card”  
on page 49.  
Installing the Battery  
1. Insert the battery into the opening on the back of the  
phone, making sure the connectors align (1).  
2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2).  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Press all along the edge of the back cover until you  
Note: Long backlight settings, searching for service, vibrate  
mode, web browser use, and other variables may  
reduce the battery’s talk and standby times.  
have a secure seal.  
Although you can use the phone while the battery is  
charging, doing so will require additional charging time.  
Note: You must fully charge the battery before using your  
phone for the first time. A discharged battery recharges  
fully in approximately 4 hours.  
Using the Travel Charger  
Note: Make sure the battery is properly installed before  
Important! Verify that the handset battery is installed prior to  
connection. If the battery is not properly installed  
and the wall charger is connected, the handset  
may power off and on continuously, preventing  
proper operation.  
switching on the phone.  
Charging the Battery  
Your phone is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. The  
Travel Charger that is used to charge the battery, is included  
with your phone. Use only Samsung-approved batteries and  
chargers.  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
       
Note: Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the  
battery, can cause damage to the phone.  
Incorrect  
Low Battery Indicator  
When the battery is weak and only a few minutes of talk time  
remain, the battery icon ( ) blinks and the phone sounds a  
warning tone at regular intervals. In this condition, your  
phone conserves its remaining battery power, not by turning  
off the backlight, but by entering the dimming mode. For a  
quick check of your battery level, glance at the battery  
charge indicator located in the upper-right corner of your  
phone’s display. Solid color ( ) indicates a full charge.  
Correct  
1. Plug the flat end of the Travel Charger into the Power/  
Accessory Interface connector and the other end into a  
standard AC wall outlet.  
When the battery level becomes too low, the phone  
automatically turns off.  
2. When charging is finished, remove the flat end from  
the interface connector jack on the phone.  
Switching the Phone On or Off  
1. Press and hold  
(on the upper right side of  
Warning! Your touch screen responds best to a light touch  
from the pad of your finger. Using excessive force or  
a metallic object when pressing on the touch screen  
may damage the tempered glass surface and void  
the phone) until the phone switches on.  
2. Sweep your finger across the screen to unlock the  
phone.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Setting up your Phone with Ready2Go  
Note: The display language is preset to English at the factory.  
To change the language, use the Language menu. For  
When you turn on your phone for the first time, you will be  
prompted to setup the AT&T Ready2Go feature.  
AT&T Ready2Go allows you to quickly and easily setup your  
phone by using the web browser on your PC. You can set-up  
email accounts, import contacts, set wallpaper, configure  
Wi-Fi and many more features.  
3. To switch off the phone, press and hold  
until the Device options screen displays.  
,
1. When the Fast & Easy Phone Set-Up screen displays,  
tap Select Language if you want to change the default  
language.  
4. Tap Power off, then tap OK to switch off the phone.  
Restarting the Phone  
1. Press and hold the Power button until the Device  
options screen displays.  
2. Touch Get Started to begin.  
– or –  
2. Tap Restart  
.
Touch Cancel to set up your phone later. You can  
Locking and Unlocking the Touch  
Screen  
access Ready2Go by tapping Applications  
Ready2Go  
AT&T  
.
1. When the phone is turned on, press  
lock the touch screen.  
to  
3. Read and follow the instructions on each screen.  
2. To unlock your phone, press  
to display the  
lock screen then sweep your finger across the screen  
in any direction to unlock the phone.  
Getting Started  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Creating a Samsung Account  
Creating a New Google Account  
An active Samsung account is required to begin accessing  
various applications. If you did not create a Samsung  
account when you first set up your phone, follow these steps:  
1. In a single motion, touch and drag the Status bar  
downward to display the Notifications panel, then tap  
(Samsung account).  
In order to utilize your phone to the fullest extent, you will  
need to create a Google™ Account when you first use your  
phone. With a Google Account, Google applications will  
always be in sync between your phone and computer.  
After you start your phone for the first time, follow these  
steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap Applications  
Gmail  
2. Tap Create new account  
.
.
3. Tap Terms and conditions to read them and tap OK  
.
The Add a Google Account screen displays.  
4. Tap the I accept all the terms above checkbox.  
2. Tap New to create a new Google account.  
5. Tap Privacy policy and read the policy and tap OK  
6. Tap Agree  
7. Enter the required information and tap Sign up  
8. At the Welcome screen, tap Next  
.
– or –  
.
If you already have a Google account, tap Existing to  
sign in and add the account to your phone.  
.
.
9. Follow the on-screen instructions to verify your email  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to add a Google  
address and activate your account.  
Account.  
Retrieving your Google Account Password  
A Google account password is required for Google  
applications. If you misplace or forget your Google Account  
password, follow these instructions to retrieve it:  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1. From your computer, use an Internet browser and  
Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone  
1. Dial your wireless phone number.  
2. Click on the Can’t access your account? link.  
3. Tap the I don’t know my password radio button.  
2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the  
asterisk key on the phone you are using.  
3. Enter your password.  
4. Enter your Email address and click Continue  
.
5. Follow the password recovery procedure.  
You are connected to your Voicemail.  
Setting Up Your Voice Mail  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
, then tap  
.
2. Follow the tutorial to create a password, record a  
greeting, and record your name.  
Note: These steps may be different depending on your  
network.  
Accessing Your Voice Mail  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
, then tap  
.
You may be prompted to enter a password.  
2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the  
voice mail center.  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
         
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone  
This section outlines some key features of your phone and  
describes the screen and the icons that display when the phone  
is in use. It also shows how to navigate through the phone and  
provides information on using a memory card.  
AT&T GPS Navigation functionality provides real-time navigation  
8 Megapixel Camera and Camcorder with autofocus, LED Flash,  
and digital zoom  
2 Megapixel Front Facing camera  
Features of Your Phone  
Your phone is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many  
useful features. The following list outlines a few of the  
features included in your phone.  
4G LTE network with 1.5 gigahertz dual core processor  
High Speed Packet Access Plus (HSPA+) delivering data speeds  
faster than the current 3G network technology.  
Brilliant 5.3” wide-screen HD Super AMOLED™ display  
Android v 4.1.2, Jelly Bean Platform  
AT&T GPS Navigation functionality provides real-time navigation  
microSD card compatibility with up to 64GB expandable memory  
slot  
Sync and update social network applications  
AllShare™ to share your media content across DLNA certified  
devices  
Over 650,000 Apps available to download from the Play Store™  
Access to Movies and TV Shows with Samsung Media Hub  
Google Video Chat via Google Talk  
S Note and S Pen apps provide free-flowing input techniques  
Touch screen with virtual (on-screen) QWERTY keyboard  
Ready access to the Internet  
Full Integration of Google Mobile™ Services (Gmail, YouTube,  
Google Maps, Google Voice Search)  
Corporate and Personal Email  
Built-in Bluetooth and Wi-Fi technology  
AllShare™ Play to share your media content across DLNA  
certified devices  
USB Tethering-capable  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1. External speaker: allows you to hear the caller.  
2. Application icons: you can place shortcuts to your  
favorite applications on the Home screen.  
3. Primary shortcuts: allows quick access to important  
features such as Phone, Calendar, Email, Browser, and  
Front View of Your Phone  
12  
11  
10  
1
4. Menu key: allows you to access sub-menus with  
additional options for different features and  
applications such as Home screen, Phone, Contacts,  
Messaging, and Web.  
9
8
5. Home key: allows you to return to the main Home  
screen from any Home screen or menu. Press and hold  
to display your recently used applications and a  
shortcut to the Task Manager.  
2
3
6. Back key: allows you step backwards when navigating  
a menu or web page.  
7. Search key: allows you to access the Google Search  
feature where you can search for items on the internet.  
8. Home screen indicator: shows which Home screen is  
presently displayed.  
4
5
6
7
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
     
9. AccuWeather Widget: displays a five-day forecast for any  
city you select along with weather and conditions. Tap  
the widget to set up the weather for a desired city or  
your current location.  
Side Views of Your Phone  
1
6
2
5
10. Indicator icons: shows the information needed to  
operate your phone, such as the received signal  
strength, phone battery level, time, unread Emails,  
missed calls, time, date, etc.  
11. Front facing camera: allows you to take pictures of  
yourself when you set the camera shooting mode to  
Self shot.  
12. Proximity and Light sensors: uses the ambient light  
level to adjust keypad access. If the light path is  
blocked, for example, when holding the phone close to  
your ear, the touch screen will turn off. Also used for  
some Camera settings.  
3
4
Left Side Right Side  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1. Microphone: balances the sound when speaking on the  
phone or recording audio.  
Rear View of Your Phone  
2. Volume keys: allow you to adjust the ringer volume  
while in standby mode or adjust the voice volume  
during a call. When receiving an incoming call, briefly  
1
2
press down either volume key (  
mute the ring tone.  
) to  
3. Power/Accessory Interface connector: allows you to  
connect a Travel Charger or other optional accessories  
such as a USB/data cable or a hands-free headset for  
convenient, hands-free conversations.  
3
4
4. Microphone: records sound when creating a video.  
5. Power/Lock key: (  
) lets you power your  
phone on and off. Also allows you to lock or unlock the  
touch screen. For more information on locking your  
1. Camera lens: is used to take pictures and shoot videos.  
2. Flash: is used to provide adequate light when taking  
pictures in dark places.  
3. External speaker: allows you to hear when the  
Speakerphone is turned on.  
6. 3.5mm Headset jack: allows you to plug in headphones.  
4. S Pen: a built-in stylus that allows you to perform  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
     
Removing the S Pen from your Phone  
The S Pen is stored in your phone to make it easier to keep  
track of.  
S Pen  
The S Pen is a stylus that assists you in performing different  
functions. By using the Pen button, you can minimize having  
to switch between touch and pen input.  
To remove the S Pen, follow these steps:  
1. Use your fingernail or a sharp object to pull the end of  
the S Pen out of the phone (1).  
1
2
1. Pen button: by pressing the Pen button, you can add  
functionality to the S Pen. For more information, refer  
2. Stylus tip: the tip of the S Pen is used for tapping the  
screen.  
2. Pull the S Pen out of the phone (2).  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Screen Capture  
Using the S Pen  
To take a screen capture, hold the S Pen button and press  
and hold the S Pen anywhere on the screen. Files are saved  
There are several different functions you can perform by  
using the S Pen.  
in the My files  
All files  
sdcard0  
Pictures  
Launch S Note Lite  
Screenshots folder. You can also find them in your Gallery in  
the Screenshots album.  
S Note Lite is an application that you can launch from any  
screen to take quick notes or jot down ideas. To open S Note  
Lite, hold the S Pen button and double-tap the screen.  
Press and Hold  
S Pen button  
Press and Hold  
S Pen button  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
 
Write on any Screen after Capture  
To write on a screen capture, use the pen to draw or write.  
Primary Shortcuts  
There are five non-movable Application Shortcuts that  
display at the bottom of all Home screens. The default  
shortcuts are:  
Files are saved in the My Files  
Pictures Screenshots folder.  
All files  
sdcard0  
Phone fordialinganumber. Formoreinformation,  
Draw or Write  
Calendar for recording events and appointments  
Email for sending and receiving email from your  
Browser for surfing the Internet. For more  
For information on using your S Pen with the S Note  
Apps for accessing the applications on your  
Display Layout  
Your display screen provides a wealth of information about  
the phone’s status and options, as well as providing access  
While viewing the Applications Menu, the Application  
shortcut changes to Home , which returns you to the Main  
screen.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
You can change the Phone, Email, and Browser application  
shortcuts to any icon that displays in the Applications menu.  
Displays when a call is in progress.  
Displays when a call is on hold.  
Indicator Icons  
This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your phone’s  
Displays when the speakerphone is on.  
display and Indicator area:  
Displays your current signal strength. The greater  
the number of bars, the stronger the signal.  
Displays when a call was missed.  
Displays when a call is muted.  
Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active. You  
cannot send or receive any calls or access online  
information.  
Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always  
forward.  
Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone.  
Displays your battery charge level. Icon shown is  
fully charged.  
Displays when there is no network available.  
Displays when your battery is charging. Also  
displays battery charge level.  
Displays when Blocking mode is enabled.  
DevicePowerCriticalShowsyourcurrentbattery  
only has three percent power remaining and will  
immediately shutdown.  
Displays when there is a system error or alert.  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21  
 
DisplayswhenyourconnectiontoanEDGEnetwork  
is active.  
Displaysinthenotificationswindowwhenthereare  
too many on-screen notification icons to display.  
Tap to show more notifications  
Displays when your phone is communicating with  
the EDGE network.  
Displays when the phone is connected to your  
computer as a media device.  
Displayswhenyour connectiontoaUTMS, HSDPA,  
HSPA, or HSPA+ network is active.  
Displays when the phone is tethered via a  
supported USB cable connection.  
Displays when a new text or multimedia message  
is received.  
Displays when your phone is communicating with  
the UTMS, HSDPA, HSPA, or HSPA+ network.  
Displayswhenyourconnectiontoa4GLTEnetwork  
is active.  
Displays when a new Voicemail is received.  
Displays when your phone is communicating with  
the 4G LTE network.  
Displays when Email is received.  
Displays when a new gmail message is received.  
Displays when your phone is downloading a file.  
Displaysinthenotificationswindowwhenactionis  
required within the Samsung account application.  
Displays when a Play Store download was  
successfully installed.  
Displays as a reminder to configure your phone  
using the AT&T Ready2Go application or to setup  
your Google Account.  
Displays when updates are available for download.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DisplayswhenthetimeanddateforaCalendarEvent  
has arrived.  
Displays when there is a Wi-Fi access point  
available but you are not connected to it. May also  
display if there is a communication issue with the  
target Wireless Access Point (WAP).  
Displayswhenyousetanalarmtoringataspecified  
time.  
DisplayswhenWi-FiDirectisactiveandyourphone  
is connected to another device.  
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Silent. All  
sounds are silenced.  
Displays when the external SD card (internal  
microSD) is disconnected (unmounted) from the  
phone and is ready for removal or formatting.  
DisplayswhentheSound profileis set toSilent and  
Vibrate mode. All sounds exceptmedia and alarms  
are silence.  
Displays when an SD card is blank or unformatted.  
Displays when Bluetooth is activated.  
Displayswhen your phone is connected to a Digital  
Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified device  
using the AllShare application.  
Displays when a Bluetooth device is paired  
with the phone.  
Displays when Bluetooth is on but is not connected  
to a Bluetooth device.  
Displays when your phone as been configured as a  
portable Wi-Fi hotspot.  
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and  
communicating with a Wireless Access Point  
(WAP).  
DisplayswhenGPSis active and acquiring asignal.  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23  
The following table contains a description of each  
application. If the application is already described in another  
section of this user manual, then a cross reference to that  
particular section is provided.  
Displays when data synchronization and  
application sync is active and synchronization is in  
progress for Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts.  
Displays when your phone is connecting to the  
Device Management server when you first turn on  
your phone.  
For information on navigating through the Applications icons,  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
, then tap one of the  
Displays when a screen capture has been taken.  
application icons.  
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
3. To return to the Home screen, tap  
The following applications are available:  
Displays when the keypad is active.  
.
Displays when the AT&T DriveMode application is  
turned on.  
AllShare Play: AllShare Play allows your phone to  
stream photos, music and videos from its memory to  
other Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified  
devices. Your phone can also play digital content  
streamed from other DLNA certified devices. For more  
Displays when a TTY device is inserted.  
For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see  
Amazon Kindle: This application allows you to  
downloadbooks, magazines, andnewspaperstoread  
Application Icons  
The Application menu provides quick access to the items you  
use most frequently.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AT&T Code Scanner: AT&T Code Scanner allows you to  
scan 2D (QR and datamatrix codes) and 1D (UPC and  
EAN)barcodesfoundinmagazines,stores,andonline.  
AT&T Navigator: AT&T Navigator provides you with  
access to real-time GPS-driven applications. These  
programs not only allow you to achieve turn-by-turn  
navigation, but also access local searches based on a  
variety of category parameters. For more information,  
AT&T DriveMode: With the AT&T DriveMode  
application, youcansetyourphonetoautoreplywhen  
you are driving and don’t want to answer the phone.  
YoucansetautoreplytoMessages,Emails,andPhone  
Calls. You can also allow up to five of your contacts to  
contact you while you are in Drive mode. For more  
AT&T Ready2Go:AT&TReady2Goallowsyou to quickly  
and easily setup your phone by using the web browser  
on your PC. You can set-up email accounts, import  
contacts, set wallpaper, configure Wi-Fi and many  
AT&TFamilyMap:providespeaceofmindbybeingable  
to conveniently locate a family member from your  
wireless phone or PC and know that your family's  
location information is secure and private. For more  
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi: With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can  
maximize your battery performance, maximize your  
data, simplify access to AT&T Hot Spots and Wi-Fi  
networks,automateyourWi-Ficonnections,andtrack  
AT&T Locker: AT&T Locker allows you to store, share,  
and sync all of your photos, videos, and documents in  
one safe, convenient place; the AT&T cloud. For more  
Browser: Open the web browser to start surfing the  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25  
Calculator:Usingthisfeatureyoucanusethephoneas  
a calculator. The calculator provides the basic  
arithmetic functions; addition, subtraction,  
multiplication, and division. You can also use this as a  
Clock: The Clock application allows you to access  
alarms, view the World Clock, set a stopwatch, use a  
timer, and setup a Desk Clock. For more information,  
Contacts: You can manage your daily contacts by  
storing their name and number in your Address Book.  
Address Book entries can be sorted by name, entry, or  
Calendar: With the Calendar application, you can  
consultthecalendarbyday,week, month, year,create  
events, and set an alarm to act as a reminder, if  
Crayon Physics: Crayon Physics is a game the uses  
two-dimensional physics, including gravity, mass,  
kinetic energy and transfer of momentum. For more  
Camera: Use your 8.0 megapixel camera feature to  
produce photos in a JPEG format. For more  
DeviceHelp:DeviceHelp provides onlineinformation to  
ChatON: With the ChatON application, you can interact  
withfriendsandfamilywithtext,images,hand-written  
notes and video shared instantly. You can also chat in  
Downloads: The Downloads application allows you to  
manage all of your downloads from the Play Store and  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Email: Email enables you to review and create email  
using various email services. You can alsoreceive text  
message alerts when you receive an important email.  
Google: The Google Search application is the same on-  
screen Internet search engine that is on the Google  
Search Bar on your main Home screen. For more  
Google+:Google+makesmessagingandsharingwith  
your friends a lot easier. You can set up Circles of  
friends, visit the Stream to get updates from your  
Circles, use Messenger for fast messaging with  
everyone in your Circles, or use Instant Upload to  
automatically upload videos and photos to your own  
Flipboard: This application creates a personalized  
digital magazine out of everything being shared with  
you. Access news stories, personal feeds and other  
Gallery: The Gallery is where you view photos and play  
back videos. For photos, you can also perform basic  
editing tasks, view a slideshow, set photos as  
wallpaper or contact image, and share as a picture  
message. For more information, refer to “Gallery” on  
page 178.  
LiveTV:LiveTVisasubscriptionservicethatallowsyou  
to watch your favorite TV shows using your handset.  
Local: Local is an application that uses Google Maps  
and your location to help you find Restaurants, Cafes,  
Bars,Attractions,andmore.Youcanalsoaddyourown  
Gmail: Gmail is a web-based email service. Gmail is  
configured when you first set up your phone.  
Depending on your synchronization settings, Gmail  
can automatically synchronize with your Gmail  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27  
   
Maps:Dependingonyourlocation,youcanviewbasic,  
custom, and satellite maps and local business  
information, including locations, contact information,  
and driving directions. You can also post public  
messages about a location and track your friends. For  
Messenger: Messenger allows you to bring groups of  
friends together into a simple group conversation.  
When you get a new conversation in Messenger,  
Google+ sends an update to your phone. For more  
MiniDiary:The Mini Diary allows you to keep a diary of  
your daily activities and also attach pictures. You can  
publish your diary entries to Facebook and MySpace.  
MediaHub:SamsungMediaHubisyouronestopforthe  
hottestmovieandTVcontent.Youcanrentorpurchase  
your favorite content and watch from the convenience  
Mobile Hotspot: This application allows you to share  
your phones’s mobile data connection as a portable  
Messages:AT&TMessagesbringsyourtexts,calls,and  
voicemail messages together into a single  
conversation thread and is accessible by phone or  
Music Player: The Music Player allows you to play  
music files that you have stored on your phone and  
memory card. You can also create playlists. For more  
Messaging:Youcansendandreceivedifferenttypesof  
My Files: My Files allows you to manage your sounds,  
images,videos,bluetoothfiles,Androidfiles,andother  
memorycarddatainoneconvenientlocation.Formore  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
myAT&T: My AT &T all o w s you t o manageyourownAT&T  
account. You can review and pay your bill, check  
minutes and data usage, upgrade to a new phone, or  
Play Magazines: With Google Play Magazines, you  
can subscribe to your favorite magazines and have  
them available to read on your phone at any time or  
Navigation: Navigation is an internet-connected GPS  
navigationsystemwithvoiceguidance.Youcantypeor  
PlayMovies&TV:WithGooglePlayMovies&TV,youcan  
rent thousands of different movies and television  
shows. You can watch instantly, or download your  
movie or show for offline viewing at a later time. For  
Paper Artist: Provides access to an in-device graphics  
Play Music: With the Google Music application, while  
online, youcanplaymusicthatyouhaveaddedtoyour  
music file as well as any music you copied from your  
PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have  
Phone: Allows you to access the dialer keypad, call  
PlayBooks:WithGoogleBooks,youcanfindmorethan  
3millionfreee-booksandhundredsofthousandsmore  
tobuyintheeBookstore.Formoreinformation,referto  
Play Store: The Google Play Store provides access to  
downloadable applications and games to install on  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29  
Polaris Office 4.0: Polaris® Office Mobile for Android  
is a Microsoft Office compatible office suite. This  
application provides a central place for managing  
your documents online or offline. For more  
Talk: Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based  
application for instant messaging offered by Google.  
Conversation logs are automatically saved to a Chats  
area in your Gmail account. This allows you to search  
a chat log and store them in your Gmail accounts. For  
S Note: The S Note application allows you to create  
notesusingthekeypad,theSPentool,orboth.Youcan  
addimages,voicerecordings,andtextallinoneplace.  
Video Player: The Video Player application plays video  
files stored on your microSD card. For more  
Voice Recorder: The Voice Recorder allows you to  
record an audio file up to one minute long and then  
immediately send it as a message. For more  
S Suggest: This application recommends popular  
applications when connected to a Wi-Fi network. All  
recommended applications are guaranteed to be  
compatible with your device. For more information,  
Voice Search: The Google Voice Search application  
allowsyoutosearchthewebusingonlyyourvoice.For  
Settings: This icon navigates to the sound and phone  
settings for your phone. It includes such settings as:  
display, security, memory, and any extra settings  
associated with your phone. For more information,  
Voice talk: With the Voice talk application you can use  
your voice to perform operations that you would  
normally have to do by hand such as dialing a phone  
number, texting a message, playing music, etc. For  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the item you want  
to search for, then tap  
4. Tap to use Google Voice Search. Follow the  
on-screen instructions.  
YouTube: YouTube is a video sharing website on which  
users can upload and share videos, and view them in  
.
YPmobile: The YP (Yellowpages) application provides  
quick and ready access to businesses, map locations,  
andstorageofyourfavoritesearches. Thisapplication  
allows you to tap into local businesses, locations, and  
events,connectingyoutoyoursearchinreal-time. For  
Menu Navigation  
You can tailor the phone’s range of functions to fit your needs  
using both menus and widgets. Menus, sub-menus, and  
features can be accessed by scrolling through the available  
on-screen menus. Your phone originally has seven home  
screens.  
Command Keys  
Menu Key  
Press  
options for the current screen or feature.  
Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-  
used applications to the Home screen or to the folders you  
Menu to display a context-sensitive menu of  
Home Key  
Press  
Home to display the Home screen. Press and hold  
Google Search Bar  
The Google Search Bar provides you an on-screen Internet  
to display your recently used applications and a shortcut to  
the Task Manager.  
search engine powered by Google™.  
Back Key  
1. From the main Home screen, sweep the screen to the  
left to bring up the next Home screen.  
Press  
step.  
Back to return to the previous screen, option or  
2. Tap the Google Search bar  
.
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31  
                 
Search Key  
Pan  
Press  
Search to launch Quick Search, to search the web  
To pan, touch and hold a selected icon, then move the phone  
and your phone.  
to the left or right to reposition it to another page. You must  
first activate Motion on your phone. Use panning to:  
Terms used in this user manual  
Tap  
Lightly touch items to select or launch them. For example:  
Move icons on your Home screens or Application Menus to  
another page.  
Tap the on screen keyboard to enter characters or text.  
Tap a menu item to select it.  
Tilt  
To activate the tilt feature, press and hold two points on the  
screen then tilt the phone back and forth to reduce or enlarge  
the screen. Use tilt to:  
Tap an application’s icon to launch the application.  
Touch and Hold  
Activate on-screen items by a touch and hold gesture. For  
example:  
Reduce or enlarge the screen in the Gallery or Browser.  
Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it.  
Using Gestures  
Touch and hold on a field to display a pop-up menu of options.  
By activating the various gesture features within the Motion  
Settings menu, you can access a variety of time saving  
functions.  
Sweep  
To sweep, lightly drag your finger vertically or horizontally  
across the screen. Use sweep when:  
To activate motion:  
Unlocking the screen  
1. From the Home screen, press  
Settings Motion  
and then tap  
Scrolling through the Home screen or a menu  
.
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon  
the screen to activate motion.  
located at the top of  
Tilt to zoom: Once enabled, you must be on a screen where  
content can be zoomed. In a single motion, touch and hold two  
points on the display then tilt the tilt the device back and forth to  
zoom in or out.  
ON  
3. Tap the checkboxes located to the right of each motion  
option to activate the motions you wish. A checkmark  
will appear.  
Pan to move icon: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired  
application shortcut icon or widget on the screen. Once it  
detaches, move the device left or right to migrate it to a new  
location.  
Caution! Excessive shaking or impact to the device may cause  
unintended results. To learn how to properly control  
motions, tap  
Settings  
Motion  
Learn  
Pan to browse images: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired  
on-screen image to pan around it. Move the device left or right to  
pan vertically or up and down to pan horizontally around the large  
on-screen image.  
about hand motions  
.
The following is a description of the available gestures:  
Direct call: Once enabled, the device will dial the currently  
displayed on-screen Contact entry as soon as you place the  
device to your ear.  
Shake to update: Once enabled, shake your device to rescan for  
Bluetooth devices, rescan for Wi-Fi devices, Refresh a Web page,  
etc.  
Smart alert: Once enabled, pickup the device to be alerted and  
notified of you have missed any calls or messages.  
Double tap to top: Once enabled, double tap the top of the  
device to be taken to the top of the current on-screen list.  
Turn over to mute/pause: Once enabled, mute incoming calls  
and any playing sounds by turning the device display down on a  
surface. This is the opposite of the Pickup to be Notified Gesture.  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
33  
     
Palm swipe to capture: Once enabled, you can capture any  
on-screen information swiping across the screen. In a single  
motion, press the side of your hand on the screen and swipe form  
left to right. The image is then copied to the clipboard.  
Home Screen Overview  
The main home screen is the starting point for many  
applications and functions, and it allows you to add items  
like application icons, shortcuts, folders, or Google widgets  
to give you instant access to information and applications.  
This is the default page and accessible from any menu by  
Palm touch to mute/pause: Once enabled, you can pause any  
on-screen video or mute any current sound by simply covering  
the screen with your hand. Once you remove your hand from the  
screen, the device goes back to normal by either continuing to  
play the current video or unmuting the current sound.  
pressing  
.
Navigating Through the Home Screens  
Your phone initially has seven home screens. If you like, you  
can place different applications on each of the home  
screens.  
Locking and Unlocking the Phone  
To lock your phone:  
From the main Home screen, sweep the screen with  
your finger in either direction. The main Home Screen  
is located in the middle with three Home screens on  
each side.  
1. Press the lock button  
right side of your phone.  
The screen should go blank.  
located on the upper  
To unlock your phone:  
1. Press the lock button  
right side of your phone.  
located on the upper  
The last screen that you were on, should be displayed.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Navigating Through the Application Menus  
Your phone initially has three Application Menus available.  
Follow these steps to navigate through the Application  
Menus:  
1. At the Home screen, tap  
. The first Application  
Note: As you add applications, the number of Application  
Menu displays.  
menus that you have available will increase.  
2. Sweep the screen left or right to access the other  
menus.  
Navigating Using Sub-Menus  
Sub-menus are available when you are at any Home screen  
or have selected a feature or application such as Phone,  
Contacts, Messaging, or Web.  
3. Tap one of the application icons.  
To access a sub-menu:  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
35  
 
1. Press  
.
Tap  
to go to the Task manager.  
A sub-menu displays at the bottom of the phone  
screen.  
– or –  
Tap  
to go to Google Search. For more information,  
2. Tap an option.  
3. When selecting Task manager  
, the following  
options are available:  
• Active applications display those currently active  
applications running on your phone.  
• Downloaded displays any installed packages or applications  
from the Play Store that are taking up memory space. Tap  
Uninstall to remove them from your phone.  
• RAM, which displays the amount of current RAM (Random  
Access Memory) currently being used and allow you to Clear  
Memory.  
Sub-Menu items  
• Storage displays a visual graph indicating the available and  
used space within the System storage, USB storage, and  
external SD card.  
Accessing Recently-Used Applications  
1. Press and hold  
from any screen to open the  
• Help provides additional battery saving techniques.  
recently-used applications window.  
2. Tap an icon to open the selected application.  
– or –  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Scroll through the list and locate your desired  
application.  
Customizing Your Home Screen  
You can customize your Home screen by doing the following:  
5. Touch and hold the application icon. This creates an  
immediate shortcut of the selected icon and closes the  
Apps tab.  
Creating Shortcuts  
Adding and Removing Widgets on the Home Screen  
Repositioning Widgets  
6. While still holding the on-screen icon, position it on the  
current page. Once complete, release the screen to  
lock the new shortcut into its new position on the  
current screen.  
Creating Folders  
Changing the Wallpaper  
Adding and Deleting Home Screens  
Creating Shortcuts  
Shortcuts are different than the current Home screen  
Widgets that only launch an application. Shortcuts activate a  
feature, action, or launch an application.  
Adding a shortcut via the Add to Home screen  
1. Press  
to activate the main Home screen.  
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.  
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the Home screen.  
Note: To move a shortcut from one screen to another, it must  
first be deleted from its current screen. Navigate to the  
new screen, then add the shortcut.  
4. From the Home screen window, tap Apps and widgets  
Folder or Page  
,
.
5. Press and hold a shortcut from the available list and  
position it on the current screen.  
Adding a shortcut from the Apps Menu  
Deleting a shortcut  
1. Press  
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.  
3. Tap to display your current applications.  
to activate the main Home screen.  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
2. Touch and hold the desired shortcut. This unlocks it  
from its location on the current screen.  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
37  
   
3. Drag the icon up to the Remove icon  
and release it.  
Adding and Removing Widgets  
Both items turn red.  
Widgets are self-contained applications that reside in either  
your Applications tab or on the main or extended Home  
screens. Unlike a shortcut, the Widget displays as an on-  
screen application.  
Note: This action does not delete the shortcut, it just removes  
it from the current screen.  
Adding a Widget  
Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts  
You can change any of your primary shortcuts with the  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.  
exception of the Applications  
and Home  
shortcuts.  
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.  
4. From the Home screen window, tap Apps and Widgets  
5. Tap the Widgets tab at the top of the screen.  
1. Press to activate the main Home screen.  
.
2. Touch and hold the primary shortcut you want to  
replace, then drag it to an empty space on any Home  
screen.  
6. Press and hold an available Widget to position it on the  
current screen, then release the Widget.  
Removing a Widget  
3. Scroll through the App menu to find the shortcut you  
want to add as the new primary short cut.  
4. Touch and hold the new shortcut, then drag it to the  
empty space in the row of primary shortcuts.  
The new primary shortcut will now appear on all Home  
screens.  
1. Touch and hold a Widget until you can move it around  
on the screen.  
2. Drag the Widget over the Remove icon  
and release  
it. Both items will turn red.  
Note: This action does not actually delete the Widget, it just  
removes it from the current Home screen.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Press and hold an application that you would like to  
Moving Icons in the Applications Menu  
delete from the Applications menu and drag it up to the  
1. Press  
2. Tap  
to activate the Home screen.  
Uninstall  
icon.  
to display your current applications.  
5. At the Uninstall prompt, tap OK  
.
3. Press  
and tap View type.  
The application is deleted.  
4. Tap Customizable grid. A green circle displays next to  
the option.  
Note: If you would like to get an application that you have  
previously deleted, use the Google Play Store to  
5. Press  
and tap Edit.  
6. Scroll through the list and locate the icon you wish to  
move.  
7. Touch and drag the icon to the position that you want.  
To move to a different page, drag the icon to the edge  
of the page until the page scrolls to the desired page.  
Creating and Managing Folders  
Folders are located on any of the seven available Home  
screens and can contain both files (such as data and images)  
and Contact information or entries.  
8. Tap Save  
.
9. Press  
to return to the main Home screen.  
To create a folder on-screen follow these steps:  
Deleting Icons from the Applications Menu  
You may only delete application icons that you have added  
yourself.  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.  
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.  
1. Press  
2. Tap  
to activate the Home screen.  
4. From the Home screen window, tap Folder  
.
to display your current applications.  
5. Enter a name for your folder and tap OK  
.
3. Press  
and tap Edit.  
6. You can now move items to your new folder.  
Understanding Your Phone  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Wallpaper  
You can change the Wallpaper (background) of your home  
Moving Home Screens  
Your phone comes with seven Home screens. You can  
screens by following these steps:  
arrange the screens in any order that you want.  
1. From any Home screen, touch and hold on an empty  
area of the screen.  
To move a Home screen, follow these steps:  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
and tap Edit page  
2. From the Home screen window, tap Set wallpaper  
3. Select the location where you would like to change the  
wallpaper. Tap Home screen Lock screen, or Home and  
lock screens  
.
2. Press  
.
3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to move.  
,
.
4. Tap one of the following options:  
• Gallery: select a wallpaper from photographs you have taken  
with your camera.  
• Live wallpapers: select an animated wallpaper. This option is  
not available for the Lock screen option.  
• Wallpapers: select from many still-life wallpapers.  
5. Select a wallpaper and tap Set wallpaper  
,
Done, or  
Cancel  
.
4. Drag it to the location that you would like to place it.  
In the following example, the second Home screen is  
moved to the last position.  
When you move a Home screen, the other Home  
screens re-order automatically.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Drag the screen down to the Remove icon  
and  
release it.  
5. Press  
to return to the main Home screen.  
Adding and Deleting Home Screens  
You can delete Home screens and then add Home screens  
5. If there are items on the Home screen that you want to  
later if you want.  
delete, the Delete home screen page prompt displays.  
To delete a Home screen, follow these steps:  
6. Tap OK to remove the page, otherwise, tap Cancel  
.
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
and tap Edit page  
7. Press  
to return to the main Home screen.  
2. Press  
.
3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to delete.  
Understanding Your Phone  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To add a Home screen, follow these steps:  
4. Press  
to return to the main Home screen.  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
and tap Edit  
You can now add items to your new Home screen.  
2. Press  
.
Notification Panel  
The Notification Panel includes a pull-down list to show  
information about processes that are running, recent  
notifications, and alerts.  
3. Tap the Home screen that contains  
.
A new screen is added.  
To display the Status indicator, follow these steps:  
On the Home screen, touch and drag the Status bar  
downward until the Notification Panel displays.  
Note: The  
icon will only be displayed if a Home screen has  
previously been deleted.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Clearing Notifications  
To clear all notifications from the Notification panel, follow  
these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, touch and hold the Status Bar,  
then drag downward until the Notification panel  
displays.  
Accessing Additional Panel Functions  
In addition to notifications, the Notification panel also  
provides quick and ready access to separate device  
functions. These can be quickly activated or deactivated by  
toggling them on or off. You can choose the functions that  
will be displayed.  
The following functions (default) can either be activated  
(green) or deactivated (gray): Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS, Sound,  
Screen rotation, Airplane mode, Power saving, Driving mode,  
and Sync.  
2. Tap the Clear button.  
The notifications clear and the panel closes.  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
43  
Unmounting the SD card  
Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to  
the SD card while removing it from the slot.  
Memory Card  
Your phone lets you use a microSD(SD) or microSDHC  
card to expand available memory space. This secure digital  
card enables you to exchange images, music, and data  
betweenSD-compatibledevice’s.Thissectionaddressesthe  
features and options of your phone’s SD functionality. The  
phone has a USB SD card mode.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Storage  
2. Tap Unmount SD card  
3. Tap OK  
Settings  
.
.
.
Mounting the SD Card  
To store photos, music, videos, and other applications. You  
must mount (install) the SD card prior to use. Mounting the  
SD card establishes a USB connection with your computer.  
SD card Available Memory Status  
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:  
Important! You must disable USB storage to mount the SD  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Storage  
Settings  
card.  
.
2. The available memory is displayed for Total space and  
1. Insert the SD card into the external, SD card slot. For  
Available space under the SD card heading.  
2. Your SD card is scanned to see the available  
information on it.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Erasing Files from the SD card  
You can erase files from the SD card using the phone.  
1. Ensure the SD card is mounted. For more information,  
refer to “Mounting the SD Card” on page 44.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Storage  
3. Tap Format SD card  
4. At the Format SD card confirmation prompt, tap Format  
SD card  
Settings  
.
.
.
Warning! Performing the next step erases all data stored on  
the SD card.  
5. Tap Delete all to format or press  
to cancel.  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45  
Section 3: Call Functions  
This section describes how to make or answer a call. It also  
includes the features and functionality associated with  
making or answering a call.  
Quick Dialing from the Contacts List  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
2. Find a contact in the list, then swipe your finger to the  
right over the number to place a call to this recipient.  
Displaying Your Phone Number  
Making an International Call  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Tap  
Settings  
About phone  
Status. Your  
, then touch and hold  
. The + character displays.  
phone number displays in the My phone number field.  
Making a Call  
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code,  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and use the on-screen  
area code, and phone number. If you make a mistake,  
keypad to enter the number you wish to dial.  
tap  
until the desired numbers are deleted.  
to make the call.  
2. Tap  
to make the call.  
3. Tap  
Manual Pause Dialing  
To manually call a number with pause(s) without storing it in  
your Contacts list:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Note: When you activate the Auto redial option in the Voice Call  
menu, the phone will automatically redial up to 10 times  
when the person does not answer the call or is already  
and use the on-screen  
keypad to enter the phone number.  
2. Press  
to display the dialer sub-menu.  
3. Tap Add 3-sec pause to add a three-second pause, and  
use the keypad to enter the additional numbers.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Dialing a Recent Number  
Tip: You can create pauses longer than three seconds by  
All incoming, outgoing and missed calls are recorded in the  
Call log. If the number or caller is listed in your Address  
Book, the associated name also displayed.  
entering multiple three-second pauses.  
4. Select Add wait to add a wait. A wait will pause the  
calling sequence until you enter a number or press a  
key.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap the Logs tab.  
.
A list of recent calls displays.  
5. Tap  
to make the call.  
3. Tap the desired Contact to enter the Details page, then  
tap to make a call.  
Correcting an Entered Number  
Use the following steps to correct a mis-typed entry when  
dialing.  
Making a Call Using Speed Dial  
You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in your  
Contacts List for speed dialing.  
1. Tap  
to display your Contacts List.  
After entering a number using the keypad:  
2. Press  
to display the Contacts List sub-menu.  
Tap  
to erase a single number.  
3. Tap Speed dial setting  
.
– or –  
4. The Speed dial setting screen displays showing the  
numbers 2 through 9. The number 1 is reserved for  
Voicemail.  
Press and hold  
Ending a Call  
Tap the  
to erase a string of numbers.  
key.  
5. Tap an unused number and the Contacts screen  
displays.  
Call Functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
47  
         
6. Select a contact to assign to the number. The selected  
Touch and drag the Reject call with message tab upward and  
contact number displays in the speed dial number box.  
tap a predefined text message to send to the caller.  
7. Press  
remove a speed dial number or change the order.  
8. Tap Change order or Remove  
9. Tap Keypad and from the Dialer, touch and hold  
to display the Speed Dial sub-menu and  
I’m driving  
I’m at the cinema  
I’m in class  
.
I’m in a meeting  
Sorry, I’m busy. Call back later.  
the speed dial number to make a call.  
Making a Call from the Address Book  
You can store phone numbers that you use regularly on the  
SIM card or in the phone’s memory. These entries are  
collectively called the Address Book.  
– or –  
Tap Create new message to compose a new message.  
For further details about the Address Book feature, see  
Answering a Call  
When a call is received the phone rings and displays the  
caller’s phone number, or name if stored in the Address  
Book.  
1. At the incoming call screen:  
Touch and drag  
Touch and drag  
in any direction to answer the call.  
in any direction to reject the call  
and send it to your voicemail.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Dialing Options  
From the Home screen and Application menus, you have the  
option to access the Dialer and initiate a call by tapping  
Keypad. From the main Contacts page or from the  
Dialer, the following tabs are located at the top of your  
screen:  
Keypad: dials the current number entered using the on-screen  
keypad.  
Logs: displays a list of all dialed, received, and missed calls.  
Favorites: displays your contacts that you have marked as  
Favorites. Also displays frequently called numbers.  
Contacts: takes you to your Address Book where you can select a  
contact to call.  
After you begin to enter numbers, the Add to Contacts option  
displays so you can save the Contact if needed.  
2. Tap  
to end the call.  
Call Log  
Note: You can answer a call while using the Address Book or  
other menu feature. After ending the call, the phone  
returns to the previously active function screen.  
The phone stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed,  
received, or missed in the Call log. The Call log displays the  
details of the call.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. Tap the Logs tab.  
Call Functions  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A list of recent calls displays. If the number or caller is  
listed in your Address Book, the associated name  
displays.  
All calls made, received, and missed are listed. Types of calls  
are identified by the following icons:  
Incoming Calls  
Outgoing Calls  
Missed Calls  
Rejected Calls  
Auto Rejected Calls  
:
:
:
:
:
Note: If there is a voicemail or message sent by the same  
number, associated icons display and are selectable.  
Viewing Missed Calls from the Home Screen  
The number of calls you missed displays on the Home  
screen.  
1. Tap the missed call icon with the number of missed  
calls on it and move it in any direction.  
2. The Call log displays. Missed calls are identified by the  
icon next to the number  
.
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Calling Back a Missed Call  
To call back a missed call number:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Add as new  
contact  
Logs.  
Update an existing  
contact  
Send a message  
A list of recent calls displays. If the number or caller is  
listed in your Address Book, the associated name  
displays.  
Call the number  
2. Tap the desired missed call. The call detail page  
displays.  
3. Tap  
.
Saving a Recent Call to your Address Book  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Logs.  
4. Enter information into the various fields using the  
keypad.  
A list of recent calls displays.  
5. Tap Save when you are finished.  
2. Tap the call you want to save to your Address Book.  
3. The call detail page displays. Tap Create contact to add  
the call to your Address Book.  
For further details about the Address Book feature, see  
The Create contact screen displays.  
– or –  
Tap Update existing if you want to replace the number  
for an existing contact.  
Call Functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51  
   
Sending a Message to a Recent Call  
Adding a Call to the Reject List  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Logs  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Logs.  
A list of recent calls displays.  
A list of recent calls displays.  
2. Tap the call you want to send a message to.  
2. Touch and hold the call you want to add to the Reject  
List.  
The call detail page displays.  
3. Tap Add to reject list.  
3. Tap  
.
Future calls from this number are rejected and sent to  
your voicemail.  
4. At the Message screen, tap the empty text field and  
use the on-screen keypad to type in a message.  
5. When you are done with your message, tap Send.  
Voice Talk  
With the Voice Talk application you can use your voice to  
perform operations that you would normally have to do by  
hand such as dialing a phone number, creating a text  
message, playing music, and more.  
Deleting a Call from the Call Log  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Logs.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Voice talk  
.
A list of recent calls displays.  
2. Read the Samsung Disclaimer then tap Confirm to  
2. Touch and hold the call you want to delete from the Call  
continue.  
log.  
3. Read the Vlingo Terms of Service then tap Agree to  
continue.  
3. Tap Delete.  
The call is deleted from the Call log.  
4. Read the information on the About Voice talk screen,  
then tap Next  
.
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5. Read the information on the Wake up Voice talk screen,  
then tap Next  
• Settings: Displays the Voice Talk settings screen.  
.
Call Duration  
6. Tap Change now if you want to change the phrase you  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Logs  
3. Press  
.
say to automatically wake up Voice talk.  
.
7. Tap Next  
8. Speak your command at the Say the command screen  
and tap Next  
9. Read the information on the What can I say? screen,  
then tap Done  
.
to display the Call log sub-menu.  
4. Tap Call duration  
.
.
5. The following times display for Voice:  
• Last call: shows the length of time for the last call.  
• Dialed calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made.  
• Received calls: shows the total length of time for all calls  
received.  
.
10. At the Voice talk screen, tap on an icon for assistance  
in using Voice command or tap Tap & Speak to speak  
what you would like to do.  
• All calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made and  
received.  
11. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Voice Talk Settings  
6. Press  
then tap Reset to reset the times to zero.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Voice talk  
.
Options During a Call  
Your phone provides a number of control functions that you  
can use during a call.  
2. Press  
then selection one of these options:  
• Set wake-up command: designates the Voice Talk wake-up  
commands. Tap Change and follow the on-screen prompts to  
create a new verbal command.  
Adjusting the Call Volume  
During a call, to adjust the earpiece volume, use the Volume  
keys on the left side of the phone.  
• Driving mode on/off: activates a verbal readout of all on-  
screen activity, actions, notifications, and more.  
Call Functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
53  
         
Press the Up volume key to increase the volume level  
and press the Down volume key to decrease the  
volume level.  
Mute: turn the onboard microphone either on or off.  
Tap Mute during a call to mute the microphone. A green line  
displays under the Mute button.  
Tap Mute again to unmute the microphone. The green line will  
turn grey when Mute is not activated.  
From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ringer volume  
using these same keys.  
Headset: connects to a Bluetooth headset.  
In-Call Options  
During an active call there are several functions available by  
tapping a corresponding on-screen button.  
Hold: place the current active call on hold.  
Tap Headset during a call to activate a Bluetooth headset. A  
green line displays under the Headset button.  
Tap Headset again to de-activate the Bluetooth headset. The  
green line will turn grey when the Headset is not activated.  
Add call: displays the dialer so you can call another person.  
Keypad: displays the on-screen keypad, where you can  
enter number using DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency).  
End call: terminates the call.  
Press  
for more options:  
Contacts: allows you to go to your Contact list.  
Message: allows you to write a message during a call.  
S Note: allows you to write a note using the S Note app.  
Noise reduction on/off: allows you to turn on the Noise  
reduction feature when you are in a noisy area. Turn it Off when  
not needed to conserve battery power.  
Speaker: routes the phone’s audio through either the speaker or  
through the earpiece.  
Tap Speaker to route the audio through the speaker. (You can  
adjust the speaker volume using the volume keys.) A green line  
displays under the Speaker button.  
Tap Speaker again to use the phone’s earpiece (see “Using  
green line will turn grey when Speaker is not activated.  
One-handed operation on/off: allows you to set your call  
screen to one-handed operation by shifting the keyboard to the  
right.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. Tap Swap.  
The current call (caller #2) is placed on hold and the  
Placing a Call on Hold  
You can place the current call on hold at any point during a  
conversation. You can also make another call while you have  
a call in progress if your network supports this service.  
previous call on hold (caller #1) is then reactivated so  
that you can continue conversing with that person. The  
active call displays in a green box.  
1. While on a call, tap Hold  
. This action places the  
current caller on hold (which displays on-screen as a  
greyed-out box).  
2. Tap  
to end the currently active call.  
To end a specific call  
1. Tap Swap until the call you want to end displays in a  
2. You can later reactivate this call by tapping Unhold.  
To make a new call while you have a call in progress  
green box.  
1. Tap Hold  
.
2. Tap  
to end the specific call.  
2. Tap Add call  
to display the dialer.  
3. Tap  
to end the remaining call.  
3. Enter the new number and tap  
.
To answer a call while you have a call in progress  
1. Touch  
Once connected, the active call displays in a large box  
in the middle of your screen and the call on hold  
displays in a small box in the upper right corner of your  
screen.  
and slide to the right to answer another call  
2. Tap Putting "Number or Name" on hold to put the first  
call on hold.  
3. To switch between the two calls, tap Swap.  
• Swap: Places the current call on hold and then activates the  
previous call. The active call displays in a green box. Tap Swap  
again to switch back.  
Switching Between Calls  
When you have an active call and a call on hold, you may  
switch between the two calls, changing the one on hold to  
active and placing the other on hold.  
Call Functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
55  
   
To end a call on hold  
3. Tap Putting "Number or Name" on hold to put the first  
call on hold.  
1. Tap  
to disconnect the active call.  
2. The call on hold, will now become the active call. Tap  
4. Join the first two callers into a single multi-party call by  
tapping Merge.  
to end the call.  
5. To temporarily leave the conference call, tap Hold  
To rejoin the conference call tap Unhold  
6. Tap to end the call.  
.
3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling)  
.
The 3-Way or Multi-Party feature allows you to answer a  
series of incoming calls and place them on hold. If this  
service is supported by the network, all calls can be joined  
together. You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting  
tone.  
Using the Speakerphone During an Active Call  
While in an active call, it is possible to enable the  
speakerphone feature.  
Note: The Merge option combines all of the calls you have  
established with your phone (both active and on hold).  
Swap places the current call on hold and then activates  
the previous call.  
1. Tap Speaker  
.
Speaker  
The Speaker button displays as  
speakerphone is activated.  
and the  
Speaker  
This feature joins all of the calls you have established with  
your phone (both active and on hold) into a multi-party call.  
1. Touch and drag  
2. Touch and drag  
call.  
in any direction to answer the call.  
in any direction to answer the next  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Example: You wish to say something to person in the room,  
but do not want the person on the phone to hear  
you.  
To mute your phone during a call  
1. Tap Mute  
Mute  
.
The Mute button displays as  
and Mute is  
Mute  
activated.  
2. Tap Mute  
to deactivate the Mute function and  
Mute  
reactivate the microphone.  
Bluetooth headset  
1. Tap Headset  
2. Use the Volume keys (located on the left side of your  
.
Headset  
phone) to adjust the volume.  
2. The phone will scan for your Bluetooth headset. When  
3. To deactivate the speakerphone, tap Speaker  
.
Speaker  
found, connect to the headset.  
The Headset button displays as  
headset is activated.  
and the Bluetooth  
Headset  
3. Tap Headset  
to deactivate the Bluetooth headset  
Headset  
Switching off the Microphone (Mute)  
and reactivate the phone speaker.  
You can temporarily switch your phone’s microphone off, so  
that the other person cannot hear you.  
Call Functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
57  
 
Searching for a Number in Address Book  
Call rejection  
1. From the Call settings screen, tap Call rejection.  
1. During the active call, press  
then tap Contacts  
2. Tap the Address Book entry.  
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn Auto reject mode on  
.
ON  
For further details about the Address Book feature, see  
3. Tap Auto reject mode and tap one of the following  
options:  
Call Waiting  
• All numbers: to reject all calls.  
The Call Waiting feature allows you to answer an incoming  
call while you have a call in progress, if this service is  
supported by the network, and you must first activate the  
Call Waiting feature:  
• Auto reject numbers: to reject all calls in your Reject list.  
4. Tap Auto reject list  
.
5. Tap to manually add numbers to the Reject list.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Call settings  
6. Tap Unknown, to create a checkmark and automatically  
Additional settings Call waiting.  
reject all calls that are not in your Contacts list.  
A checkmark will appear in the box when activated.  
You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting  
tone.  
Set reject messages  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call settings  
Set reject messages  
.
Call Settings  
To access the Call settings menu:  
2. Tap  
to manually add a reject message.  
– or –  
Tap one of the pre-written messages to be displayed  
when you want the call to be rejected. You can edit the  
message if desired.  
From the Home screen, tap  
settings  
Call  
.
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3. Tap Save to save the reject message.  
Call answering/ending  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call settings  
Ringtones and keypad tones  
Answering/ending  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call settings  
2. The following options are available:  
Ringtones and keypad tones  
2. Tap Device ringtone, select a ringtone, and tap OK  
3. Tap Device vibration, select a vibration type, and tap  
OK  
.
• The home key answers calls: Tap this option to be able to  
accept incoming calls by pressing the Home key.  
.
• The power key ends calls: This option will allow you to end a  
call by pressing the power key without turning off the screen.  
.
4. Tap Vibrate when ringing to create a checkmark if you  
want your phone to vibrate when a call is incoming.  
5. Tap Keytones to create a checkmark if you want tones  
to play when the keypad is pressed.  
Turn off screen during calls  
This option turns on the proximity sensor during calls so that  
your phone will know to turn the screen off to save power.  
From the Home screen, tap  
settings Turn off screen during calls to create a  
checkmark and enable the feature.  
Call  
Call alert  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call alert  
Call settings  
.
Call accessory settings  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Call vibrations to enable your phone to vibrate  
when the called party answers the phone.  
Call settings  
Call accessories  
.
3. Tap Call status tones to set the sound settings during a  
call then tap OK  
.
2. The following options are available:  
• Automatic answering: configures the device to automatically  
4. Tap Alerts on call to turn off alarm and message  
answer and incoming call when a headset is detected.  
notifications during a call.  
Call Functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
59  
• Automatic answering timer: configures the time delay before  
the device automatically accepts the incoming call.  
• Outgoing call conditions: allows you to make calls even when  
the device is locked.  
• Forward when unanswered: allows you to forward voice calls  
to a designated number instead of your voicemail number  
when there is no answer on your phone. You can also select  
the amount of time that the phone delays before forwarding.  
• Forward when unreachable: allows you to forward voice calls  
to a designated number instead of your voicemail number  
when you are not in an area covered by your service provider or  
when your phone is switched off.  
Increase volume in pocket  
This option increases the ringtone volume when the device is  
in a pocket or a bag. It uses the proximity sensor to detect its  
location.  
Additional settings  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Additional settings  
2. Tap one of the following options:  
• Caller ID: allows you to choose how your Caller ID will be  
displayed. Select Network default Hide number, or Show  
number  
From the Home screen, tap  
settings Increase volume in pocket to create a  
checkmark and enable the feature.  
Call  
Call settings  
.
Call forwarding  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call settings  
,
Call forwarding  
.
.
2. Tap one of the following options:  
• Call waiting: the network service informs you when someone  
is trying to reach you during another call. Tap to activate.  
• Auto redial: automatically redials the last number if the call  
was either cut off or was unable to connect. Tap to activate.  
• Noise reduction: allows you to suppress background noise  
from your side during calls.  
• Always forward: allows you to forward all voice calls.  
• Forward when busy allows you to forward voice calls to a  
designated number instead of your voice mail number if you  
are on another phone call.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Fixed Dialing Numbers: allows you to restrict outgoing calls to  
a limited set of phone numbers.  
Changing the PIN2 Code  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call settings  
Additional settings  
Fixed dialing numbers.  
• Auto area code: allows you to automatically prepend a specific  
area code to all outbound calls. Slide the slider to the on  
position.  
2. Tap Change PIN2  
.
3. At the prompt, enter your old PIN2 code.  
4. At the prompt, enter a new PIN2 code.  
5. Confirm your PIN2 code.  
Using Fixed Dialing Numbers  
Enabling FDN  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Additional settings Fixed dialing numbers  
2. Tap Enable FDN  
Call settings  
Managing the FDN List  
When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to  
phone numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card.  
.
.
3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK  
.
Note: Before you can manage an FDN list a list must be  
FDN is enabled.  
created.  
4. To enable FDN after it has been disabled, tap Disable  
FDN, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Additional settings Fixed dialing numbers  
2. Tap FDN list  
Call settings  
.
.
Important! Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card  
does not, this menu does not display.  
.
3. A list of all existing FDN numbers will be displayed.  
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering  
an incorrect PIN2 code could cause the phone to  
lock. Contact customer service for assistance.  
Voicemail service  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call settings  
Voicemail Service.  
Call Functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
61  
Voicemail service provided by your carrier is the  
default.  
Vibrate  
This option allows you select vibration settings.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Vibrate  
Call settings  
2. Tap My carrier to remove the carrier Voicemail service.  
.
Voicemail settings  
You can view or modify your voicemail number from this  
2. Tap Always Only in Silent mode, or Never.  
,
TTY Mode  
menu.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Voicemail settings  
Call settings  
A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a  
telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf,  
hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities,  
to communicate by telephone.  
.
2. Tap the Voice mail number field, backspace to erase the  
digits, and enter a new voicemail number using the  
Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices. Please  
check with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure  
that it is compatible with digital cell phones.  
keypad, then tap OK  
3. Tap OK  
Ringtone  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Ringtone  
2. Tap a ringtone to hear it played.  
.
.
Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable  
that plugs into your phone’s headset jack. If this cable was  
not provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device  
manufacturer to purchase the connector cable.  
Call settings  
.
3. Select a ringtone and tap OK  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
TTY mode  
Call settings  
.
2. Tap TTY Full to turn TTY mode on. Tap TTY Off to turn it  
off.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hearing aids  
This option allows you to turn on Hearing aid compatibility on  
your device.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
settings  
Call  
.
2. Tap Hearing aids to create a checkmark and make your  
device compatible with a Hearing aid.  
Call Functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
63  
Section 4: Entering Text  
This section describes how to select the desired text input  
method when entering characters into your phone. This  
section also describes the predictive text entry system that  
reduces the amount of key strokes associated with entering  
text.  
Entering Text Using the Samsung  
Keyboard  
From a screen where you can enter text, rotate your phone  
counterclockwise to a Landscape orientation. The on-screen  
QWERTY keypad will display.  
Your phone comes equipped with an orientation detector that  
can tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or  
sideways (Landscape) orientation. This is useful when  
entering text.  
Text Input Methods  
There are three text input methods available:  
Samsung keyboard (default): Samsung’s on-screen  
QWERTY keypad that can be used in both portrait and  
landscape orientation.  
Shift  
Key  
Delete  
Key  
Google Voice typing: allows you to enter text by speaking.  
Swype: a new way to enter text on touch screens. Instead  
of tapping each key, use your finger to trace over each  
letter of a word.  
Voice Typing  
and Settings  
New  
Paragraph  
Space Bar  
Text Input Mode  
To change the input method, see “Keyboards and Input  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Changing the Text Input Mode - Keypad  
There are two main keypad layout keys that will change the  
on-screen keys within the QWERTY keypad.  
The available Text Input modes are: Sym and Abc  
.
Symbol Mode: activates the symbol, special  
characters, and emoticon keys.  
Sym  
ABC Mode: activates the default alphabet keys.  
Can also be set to Abc or abc by using the shift  
3. Tap the desired alphabetic characters.  
ABC  
4. The screen initially opens in ABC mode. After typing the  
(
) key.  
first letter, the shift key (  
and following letters will be lowercase.  
5. Tap to input another upper-case letter or tap  
twice to switch to ABC mode. The shift key will  
) will change to  
Note: When in ABC mode, the Sym button will appear. When in  
Sym mode, the ABC button will appear.  
change to  
in ABC mode. All following letters  
will be uppercase until you tap the shift key again.  
Using ABC Mode  
1. If desired, rotate your phone counterclockwise to a  
Landscape orientation.  
Using Symbol Mode  
Use Symbol Mode to add symbols, special characters, and  
emoticons.  
2. When you tap the Enter message field, the following  
screen displays:  
1. Rotate your phone counterclockwise to a Landscape  
orientation.  
Entering Text  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
65  
         
Sym  
2. Tap  
at the bottom of the screen. The following  
3. In the text portion of the message screen, begin typing  
a word. A list of word options is displayed. Tap one of  
the words to replace the word that has already been  
typed or scroll the line of words to the left for more  
word choices.  
screen displays:  
3. Tap the desired symbol, special character, or emoticon  
characters.  
1/2  
4. Tap the  
button to access additional symbols.  
to return to ABC mode.  
4. Press  
for more options.  
ABC  
5. Tap  
Predictive Text  
Note: You can also use Predictive Text mode in the portrait  
By using the Predictive Text option, you can have next-letter  
prediction and regional error correction, which compensates  
for pressing the wrong keys on the QWERTY keyboard.  
orientation.  
1. Press and hold  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the  
Predictive text field, to  
on the keyboard, then tap  
.
.
ON  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handwriting Mode  
The phone also provides the ability to use the S Pen to  
handwrite on the screen. This writing converts to text as  
easily as the voice text feature.  
1. From the keyboard, press and hold the  
icon,  
then tap to enable the Handwriting to Text mode.  
2. Remove the S Pen from the location at the bottom of  
the phone.  
3. Touch the screen with the S Pen in the handwriting  
area and begin writing.  
Samsung Keyboard Settings  
For information on how you can configure your Samsung  
4. Stop after each word and allow one second for the  
phone to recognize the characters and realize you have  
stopped writing.  
UsingtheGoogleVoiceTypingFeature  
You can use your voice to enter text using the Google Voice  
typing feature.  
5. Press the spacebar to add a space, and proceed  
writing the next set of characters.  
1. From the keyboard, tap the  
icon.  
The Voice Typing screen is displayed.  
Entering Text  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
67  
     
correcting algorithms and a language model to predict the  
next word. Swype also includes a tapping predictive text  
system.  
The following example shows how to enter the word “This”.  
Put your finger down on the “T”, and without lifting, glide it  
to the “h”, then to the “i” then over to the “s”.  
2. At the Listening prompt, speak into the device’s  
microphone and watch your text being entered on-  
screen.If the text is incorrect, tap the DELETE box.  
3. The text is displayed in the message as you are  
speaking.  
Enabling and Configuring Swype  
The Samsung keyboard is the default text input method, so  
to use Swype, you must first change the default keyboard  
setting.  
Note: The feature works best when you break your message  
down into smaller segments.  
Entering Text Using Swype  
Swype™ is a text input method that allows you to enter a  
word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter,  
lifting your finger between words. Swype uses error  
To enable Swype:  
1. From the keypad, touch the top of the screen and drag  
it down to display your notification panel.  
2. Tap Choose input method  
.
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Tap the Swype radio button. It will turn green.  
The Swype keyboard is displayed.  
Swype Settings  
For information on how you can configure your Swype  
Swype Text Entry Tips  
You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video  
or tutorial on using Swype. You can also use the following  
Swype text entry tips.  
Create a squiggle (like an S shape) to create a double letter (such  
as pp in apple).  
Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a  
selection.  
Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter  
contractions.  
Double-tap on the word you want to change to correct a  
misspelled word, then tap the delete key to erase one character.  
Touch and hold the delete key to erase an entire word.  
Entering Text  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
69  
 
Section 5: Contacts and Your Address Book  
This section allows you to manage your daily contacts by  
storing their name and number in your Address Book.  
Address Book entries can be sorted by name, entry, or group.  
You can also manage your Address Book on the web  
at http://www.att.com/addressbook  
.
Synchronizing your AT&T Address Book  
If you ever upgrade, damage, or lose your phone, you can  
easily restore your contacts onto your new phone by  
following these steps:  
AT&T Address Book Activation  
When you access the AT&T Address Book, the network  
backup service, contacts are automatically synchronized  
between your phone and online address book. The changes  
you make are automatically saved and if you ever upgrade,  
damage, or lose your phone, you can easily restore your  
contacts onto your new phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
2. Press Settings AT&T Address Book  
3. At the AT&T Address Book screen, tap Yes to  
.
.
synchronize your phone with your online Address Book.  
4. If there are existing contacts on your phone, you will be  
prompted if you would like to remove them first. Tap  
To activate the AT&T Address Book:  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
Your Address Book displays.  
Yes or No  
.
2. If you have not synchronized your phone with your  
online AT&T Address Book recently, the AT&T Address  
Book screen displays. Tap Yes if you want to  
synchronize your Address Book.  
Adding a New Contact  
Use the following procedure to add a new contact to your  
Address Book.  
Saving a Number from the Home screen  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
3. Follow the onscreen instructions.  
.
Your AT&T Address Book is Ready to Use. You can now make  
a call or send a message through your Address Book.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Mobile  
2. At the Save contact to prompt, tap Phone  
,
SIM, or  
The Mobile button  
initially displays next to the  
Account name.  
Phone number field. If you want to add a phone number  
that is not a mobile number, tap the Mobile button and  
select from Mobile, Home, Work, Work fax, Home Fax,  
Pager, Other, Custom (add your own label), or Callback.  
3. Tap the image icon and assign a picture to the new  
entry by choosing one of three options:  
• Image: retrieve a previously stored image from your Gallery or  
from your My files folder and assign it to this entry. Tap an  
6. Enter the phone number.  
image to assign the image to the contact, then tap Done  
Take picture: use the camera to take a new picture and assign  
it to this entry, then tap Done  
.
Tap  
to add another Phone number field or tap  
to delete a field.  
.
7. Tap any of the following fields that you want to add to  
your new contact:  
• Remove: although not an option with a new entry, deletes any  
previously assigned image on an existing contact.  
• S Note: use an image from the S Note application.  
4. Tap the Name field and use the on-screen keypad to  
• Groups: assign the contact to Not assigned, ICE - emergency  
contacts, Co-workers, Family, or Friends.  
• Ringtone: adds a field used to assign a message tone that will  
sound when messages are received from this contact. Choose  
between Default, Ringtones, or Go to My files.  
• Message alert: allows you to set the ringtone for your  
message alerts.  
– or –  
Tap  
next to the Name field to display additional  
name fields.  
• Vibration pattern: allows you to set the specific type of  
vibration.  
5. Tap the Phone number field.  
The numerical keypad displays.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
71  
• Add another field  
:
tap this button to add another field such as  
6. Tap Pause to add a two-second pause or tap Wait to  
add a wait, and use the keypad to enter the additional  
numbers. A pause displays as a comma (,) and a wait  
displayed as a semi-colon (;).  
Phonetic name, Organization, Email, IM, Address, Notes,  
Nickname, Website, Internet call, Events, or Relationship.  
8. Tap Save to save the new contact.  
7. Tap Save to save your changes, or tap Cancel to  
discard.  
Adding Pauses to Contact Numbers  
When you call automated systems, you are often required to  
enter a password or account number. Instead of manually  
entering the numbers each time, you can store the numbers  
in your Contacts along with special characters called pauses  
and waits. A pause will stop the calling sequence for two  
seconds and a wait will pause the calling sequence until you  
enter a number or press a key.  
Editing an Existing Contact  
When editing an existing contact, you can tap a field and  
change or delete the information, or you can add additional  
fields to the contact’s list of information.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
, and then tap  
the name or number to open the Contact.  
To add a pause or a wait to a Contact:  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
2. Tap  
to edit.  
, and then tap  
3. Tap  
to add a new field and tap  
to delete a  
the name or number to open the Contact.  
field.  
2. Tap  
to edit.  
4. Tap any of the fields to add, change, or delete  
information.  
3. Tap the phone number field.  
4. Tap the screen at the position where the pause or wait  
5. Tap Save to save the edited information.  
needs to be added.  
Sym  
5. Tap  
.
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Contacts  
Dialing or Messaging from Address Book  
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book,  
you can dial them easily and quickly by either using their SIM  
card location number or by using the Search field to locate  
the entry.  
From the Address book, you can also send messages.  
Finding an Address Book Entry  
You can store phone numbers and their corresponding  
names onto your SIM card and phone’s onboard memory.  
The two locations are physically separate but are used as a  
single entity, called the Address Book.  
3. Tap the contact you wish to call or message.  
4. Tap the phone icon to make a phone call or tap the  
message icon to send a message.  
Depending on your particular SIM card, the maximum  
number of phone numbers the SIM card can store and how  
they are stored may differ.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
2. Within the Contacts list (sorted alphabetically), tap a  
letter on the right side of the display to quickly jump to  
the contacts beginning with that letter.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
73  
       
The next time you synchronize your phone with your  
accounts, any updates that contacts make to email account  
names, email addresses, etc. automatically update in your  
contacts list.  
Tip: From the Contact list, sweep right over a listing to make a  
call. Sweep left over a listing to send a message.  
For more information about synchronizing accounts, see  
Joining Contacts  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to join to  
another entry). Note: typically this is the same contact  
with a different name or account information.  
Joining Contact Information  
Many people now maintain multiple email accounts, social  
networking logins, and other similar account information. For  
example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a  
corporate email account login because they are maintained  
separately and for different groups of people.  
3. Press  
Join contact.  
The contact list displays.  
4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to  
join). The second contact is now joined with the first  
and the account information is merged into one screen.  
This phone can synchronize with multiple accounts such as  
Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, Corporate email, and Google.  
When you synchronize your phone with these accounts, each  
account creates a separate contact entry in the Contacts list.  
Note: The information is still maintained in both entries, but  
displays in one record for easier viewing when you join  
the contacts.  
If one of your contacts (Amy Smith, for example) has a  
regular email account that you maintain in Gmail, but also  
has a Facebook account under her maiden and married  
name, as well as a Yahoo! chat account, when you merge  
these accounts into your Contacts list you can join all of her  
entries and view the information in one record.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. Tap the Connections bar to view the contact information  
you joined. The contacts and information displays with  
an icon next to the contact name to indicate what type  
of account information is contained in the entry.  
3. Press  
Mark as default. The Mark as default  
screen displays radio buttons next to the contact  
names or phone numbers of all the linked contacts.  
The radio button next to the default contact is green.  
4. To change the default contact, tap the radio button next  
to another entry that you want to be the default. The  
Unjoining a Contact  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
radio button will turn green, then tap Done  
.
2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you  
want to unlink an entry). Note: typically this is the same  
contact with a different name or account information.  
3. Tap the area below the Connections bar.  
Synchronizing Accounts  
From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications  
to synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if  
you want the applications to synchronize automatically. After  
determining how you want the accounts to synchronize,  
indicate which account to synchronize with your Contacts  
list.  
4. Tap the minus sign  
next to entry in which you  
want to unjoin. The contact is now separated and no  
longer displays in the merged record screen.  
Marking a Contact as Default  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
2. Press then tap Accounts  
.
When you use messaging type applications, the application  
needs to know which information is primary (default) in a  
contact entry list. For example, you may have three different  
contact records for John Smith, so the application is looking  
for the “default” number or entry.  
.
3. Tap the Auto sync app data checkbox to create a  
checkmark and activate the feature.  
4. Tap OK to synchronize all accounts.  
The accounts are synchronized.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
2. Tap a Contact name.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Send email: allows you to send an email using your Google  
account.  
Address Book Options  
You can access Address Book options while at the main  
Address Book page or while in the details page for a specific  
entry.  
• Send message: allows you to send a text or picture message.  
• Contacts to display: You can choose to display All contacts,  
only contacts saved to the SIM or Phone, or a Customized list.  
Tap a selection then tap Done.  
Options in Address Book  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
then  
press  
.
• Settings: allows you to choose set the following options:  
2. The following options display:  
Only contacts with phones: allows you to only display  
contacts that have phone numbers.  
• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.  
• SIM Management: allows you to copy contacts from your  
phone to your SIM card or from your SIM card to your phone.  
You can also delete contacts from your SIM.  
List by: allows you to sort by First name or Last name.  
Display contacts by: allows you to sort by First name or Last  
name first.  
• Import/Export: allows you to move contacts to or from your  
memory card. You can also send a namecard via Bluetooth,  
ChatON, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
• Accounts: allows you to add and manage mobile accounts on  
Facebook, Google, and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. Tap  
Add account and then follow the on-screen instructions.  
• Speed dial setting: allows you to set up speed-dialing. For  
more information, refer to “Making a Call Using Speed Dial” on  
Service numbers: allows you to display or edit your service  
numbers.  
Contact sharing settings: allows you to send all or individual  
contacts via Bluetooth in the form of namecards.  
AT&T Address Book: allows you to access the AT&T Address  
Book so you can sync your contacts.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Share namecard via: allows you to send the contact’s  
information via Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or  
Wi-Fi Direct.  
Options at Selected Contact Screen  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
2. Tap a contact and at the contact’s display screen,  
press  
• Add to/Remove from reject list: allows you to add or remove  
the contact from your reject list. If they call while being on the  
reject list, the call will be sent directly to voice mail.  
• Print contact info: allows you to print the contact’s namecard  
to a Samsung printer using Wi-Fi.  
.
3. The following options display:  
• History: allows you to view the phone and message history for  
the contact.  
• Edit: allows you to edit the contact’s information.  
• Delete: allows you to delete the contact from your Address  
Book.  
• Add shortcut to Home: allows you to place a shortcut for this  
contact on your Home screen.  
Groups  
• Join contact: allows you to join contacts with other contacts  
(only displays when contact is saved to SIM).  
• Separate contact: allows you to separate contacts that have  
been joined.  
Adding a Contact to a Group  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
2. Press and hold a contact that you would like to add to a  
• Mark as default: when you have multiple contacts linked  
together, you can mark one of them as default (only displays  
when contact is saved to the phone). For more information,  
• Assign speed dial: allows you to assign this contact to your  
group.  
3. Tap Add to group  
.
4. Tap a group (or groups) that you would like to add the  
contact to. A checkmark will appear.  
5. Tap Save  
.
The contact is added to the group.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
77  
     
6. Tap each contact you want to add to create a  
checkmark. You can also tap Select all  
7. Tap Done  
Removing a Contact From a Group  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
Groups  
.
.
Groups  
2. Tap a group entry.  
8. Tap Save to save the new Group category.  
3. Press  
Remove member.  
Editing a Caller Group  
To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as  
part of the selected group.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this  
group. A green checkmark will appear next to their  
name.  
Groups  
5. Tap Done  
.
.
Groups  
The contacts are now removed from the group.  
2. Tap a group entry.  
3. Press  
Edit.  
Creating a New Group  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
4. Make modifications to the Group name Group ringtone,  
,
Groups  
or Vibration pattern fields.  
Create.  
Groups  
5. Tap Add member to add more contacts to this group.  
6. Tap Done  
2. Tap the Group name field and use the on-screen  
keypad to enter a new group name.  
.
7. Tap Save to save the edited Group category.  
3. Tap Group ringtone to choose an audio file for  
assignment to this new group. Choose from Default  
,
Address Book Favorites  
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book,  
you can add them to your Favorites list.  
Ringtones, or Go to My files  
.
4. Tap Vibration pattern to choose an audio file for  
assignment to this new group.  
To view your Favorites list:  
5. Tap Add member to add contacts to the new group.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
Favorites  
Copying a Contact to the SIM Card  
.
Favorites  
Note: When storing an Address Book entry into the SIM card,  
note that only the name, phone number, group, and slot  
location are initially offered as fields (some SIM cards  
may allow an address as well). To save additional  
information for a particular contact, such as other phone  
numbers, or e-mail, it is important to add new fields to  
that Contact information. It is also important to note that  
if you move the SIM card to another phone that does not  
support additional fields on the SIM card, this additional  
information may not be available.  
Adding Favorites to your Address Book  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that  
you want to add to your favorites list.  
3. Tap Add to favorites on the displayed list.  
4. A gold star displays next to the contact in the Address  
Book.  
Removing Favorites from your Address Book  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
SIM Management  
2. Tap Copy Contacts to SIM  
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that  
you want to remove from your favorites list. Contacts in  
your Favorites list will have a gold star.  
.
.
The phone then displays a list of your current phone  
contacts.  
3. Tap Remove from favorites on the displayed list.  
4. The gold star will no longer display next to the contact  
in the Address Book.  
3. Tap the contacts to copy to the SIM card.  
Repeat this step for each individual copy, or tap Select all  
.
Managing Address Book Entries  
You can copy, delete, and view the memory status for the  
Phone and SIM entries on your phone.  
4. Tap Done  
.
Contacts and Your Address Book  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
79  
     
Deleting Address Book Entries  
You can delete Phone or SIM entries from the phone’s  
memory.  
Note: Some information might be lost during the copy to SIM  
card.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
5. Tap OK  
.
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that  
you want to delete.  
6. Tap OK at the Copy Successful display.  
The selected numbers are copied to the SIM card.  
3. Tap Delete on the displayed list.  
4. At the Delete contact prompt, tap OK to delete the  
contact or Cancel to exit.  
Copying a Contact to the Phone  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
More  
SIM Management.  
Using the Service Dialing Numbers  
2. Tap Copy Contacts from SIM  
.
You can view the list of Service Dialing Numbers (SDN)  
assigned by your service provider. These numbers may  
include emergency numbers, customer service numbers, and  
directory inquiries.  
The phone then displays a list of your current contacts  
stored on your SIM card.  
3. Tap each contacts to copy to the phone. A check  
indicates selection.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
Settings  
2. Tap Service numbers  
Repeat this step for each individual copy, or tap Select all  
4. Tap Done  
5. At the Copy Successful display, tap OK  
The selected numbers are copied to your phone.  
.
.
.
.
.
3. Scroll through the numbers and tap a number to call.  
Note: This menu is available only when your SIM card  
supports Service Dialing Numbers.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Section 6: Multimedia  
This section explains how to use the multimedia features of  
your phone, including AT&T Locker, Media Hub, Music Hub,  
Music Player, Google Play Music, Video Player, Play Movies &  
TV, Gallery, Camera, and Camcorder.  
6. At the AT&T Locker homescreen, tap Sign Me Up! to  
create an account or tap Sign In if you already have an  
account.  
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to use AT&T Locker.  
AT&T Locker  
AT&T Locker allows you to store, share, and sync all of your  
photos, videos, and documents in one safe, convenient  
place; the AT&T cloud.  
Media Hub  
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie  
and TV content. With hundreds of titles available at your  
fingertips, entertaining yourself or your kids on the go has  
never been easier. You can rent or purchase your favorite  
content and watch from the convenience of anywhere.  
Featuring the stunning viewing quality Samsung is known  
for, Samsung Media Hub is your gateway to mobile video like  
you've never experienced it before.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
AT&T Locker  
.
2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already  
The Play Store is displayed.  
3. The first time you sign in, the Play Store Terms of  
Service will be displayed. Tap Accept to continue or  
Decline to exit.  
Note: Media Hub usage is based on service availability.  
Using Media Hub  
4. Tap Update  
5. Tap Accept & download  
AT&T Locker will be downloaded to your device.  
.
1. Tap  
Settings  
Security  
Unknown sources to  
activate and allow the Samsung app to run.  
.
2. Tap OK after reading the disclaimer.  
Multimedia  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
• My Media: allows you to view all of the media that you have  
purchased or rented. Tap a media entry to view it.  
Important! Your phone and personal data are more vulnerable  
to attack by applications from unknown sources.  
Installing these applications may cause damage or  
loss of data and Samsung does not take any  
responsibility.  
8. Scroll through the media listings and tap on an item to  
purchase or rent.  
9. At the Details screen, follow the on-screen instructions  
to create a Samsung account and make a purchase.  
10. Media stores in the My Media folder.  
3. Tap  
Media Hub  
.
4. Read the Terms and Conditions screen and tap the  
agree to the Terms and Conditions checkbox.  
5. Tap Accept to continue or Decline to exit.  
The Media Hub screen displays.  
I
Media Hub Notices  
Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after  
you create an account in Media Hub.  
Media Content that is downloaded may be viewed concurrently on  
up to five (5) devices with Media Hub that are also registered to  
the same account.  
6. At the Media Hub screen, What’s New displays with  
recently added media that you can rent or purchase.  
7. Tap  
for the following options:  
You may choose to remove a device from your account no more  
than once every 90 days.  
• Movies: displays movies that are available for rent or purchase.  
Scroll through the top navigation bar and select a movie  
category. The movies of that type are displayed below.  
• TV Shows: displays TV shows that are available for purchase.  
Scroll through the top navigation bar and select a TV category.  
The TV shows of that type are displayed below.  
You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as  
you’d like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media  
Content at a later point in time subject to content re-download  
availability and studio permissions.  
You MUST be in network coverage to license Media Content you  
have acquired through the Service.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You can use 3G, 4G, or Wi-Fi connectivity in order to download  
Media Content.  
In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period  
of more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis)  
after the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin  
viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental  
transaction, but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented  
Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty-four  
(24) consecutive hour period if such period would extend the  
viewable time beyond the thirty (30) day rental window).  
Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be  
viewable on only 1 device in your account.  
Media Content is downloaded and saved onto the SD card.  
Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks  
where there is a weak signal.  
You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a)  
license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the  
Media Content has been buffered.  
You cannot play any media content downloaded from Media Hub  
through any output on your mobile phone, including All Share.  
Play Movies & TV  
You must finish watching rented Media Content within 24  
consecutive hours of start of playback.  
With Google Play Movies & TV, you can rent thousands of  
different movies and television shows. You can watch  
instantly, or download your movie or show for offline viewing  
at a later time.  
Stopping, pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not  
extend the available viewing time.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Play Movies & TV  
.
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already  
done so.  
3. Following the on-screen instructions for renting and  
viewing movies.  
Multimedia  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Tap the MOVIES tab to view movies you can rent.  
5. Tap the TV SHOWS tab to view shows you can rent.  
6. Tap the PERSONAL VIDEOS tab to view movies you have  
on your phone or memory card.  
6. The Live TV main page displays. Follow the on-screen  
instructions to watch TV.  
Note: Live TV uses a large amount of data and you are  
responsible for all data charges. It is strongly  
recommended that you upgrade to a large data plan in  
addition to this purchase.  
7. Press  
for additional options.  
Live TV  
Live TV is a subscription service that allows you to watch  
your favorite TV shows using your handset.  
1. Sign up or Sign in to a Google Account. For more  
Music Player  
The Music Player is an application that can play music files.  
The music player supports files with extensions AAC, AAC+,  
eAAC+, MP3, WMA, 3GP, MP4, and M4A. Launching the  
Music Player allows you to navigate through your music  
library, play songs, and create playlists (music files bigger  
than 300 KB display).  
2. Tap  
Live TV  
.
Note: The first time you use Live TV, you will need to download  
the updated application from the Play Store. When the  
Play Store page displays, tap Update or Install then  
follow the on-screen instructions. For more information,  
Playing Music  
1. Tap  
Music player  
.
2. Tap a library category at the top of the screen (All,  
Playlists, Albums, Artists, or Folders) to view the  
available music files.  
3. The AT&T U-verse Live TV website displays.  
4. Tap Accept to accept the Terms and Conditions.  
5. Tap Start Trial to use the 7 day Trial.  
3. Scroll through the list of songs and tap an entry to  
begin playback.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
4. The following Music Player controls are available:  
Displays the current song in the player  
window.  
Pause the song.  
Provides access to the SoundAlive feature.  
Start the song after being paused.  
Pressandholdtorewindthesong. Tapto go  
to the previous song.  
Music Player Options  
To access additional options, follow these steps:  
Pressandholdtofast-forwardthesong.Tap  
to go to the next song.  
1. While in the Music Player, press  
.
2. The follow options are available:  
Volume control.  
• Add to quick list: adds the current music file to the Quick list.  
• Via Bluetooth: scans for devices and pairs with a Bluetooth  
headset.  
Repeat one: repeats the currently playing  
song.  
• Share via: allows you to share your music by using Bluetooth,  
Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
• Add to playlist: allows you to add the current music file to a  
selected playlist.  
Repeat all: replays the current list when the  
list ends.  
Play All: plays the current song list once.  
Shuffle On: the current list of songs are  
randomly shuffled for playback.  
• Set as: allows you to set a music file to Phone ringtone, Caller  
ringtone, or Alarm tone.  
Shuffle Off: songs play in order and are not  
shuffled.  
• Scan for nearby devices: allows you to scan for nearby  
devices to share music.  
Lists the current playlist songs.  
Multimedia  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Settings: allows you to change your music player settings. For  
more information, refer to “Music Player Settings” on page  
86.  
• Music menu: this menu allows you to select which categories  
you want to display. Choices are: Albums, Artists, Genres,  
Music square, Folders, Composers, Years, Most played,  
Recently played, or Recently added. Tap each item that you  
want to display in the Music menu.  
• Details: allows you to view media info such as Artist, Title,  
Album, Track Length, Genre, Recording date, etc.  
• End: allows you to end the Music Player app.  
• Lyrics: when activated, the lyrics of the song are displayed if  
available.  
Music Player Settings  
• Music auto off: when activated, music will automatically turn  
off after a set interval.  
The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set  
preferences for the music player such as whether you want  
the music to play in the background, sound effects, and how  
the music menu displays.  
Using Playlists  
Playlists are used to assign songs to a list of preferred media  
which can then be grouped into a list for later playback.  
These Playlists can be created via either the handset’s Music  
Player options menu or from within a 3rd party music  
application (such as Windows Media Player) and then  
downloaded to the handset.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press Settings  
3. Select one of the following settings:  
Music player  
.
.
• SoundAlive: set a type of equalization such as Normal, Pop,  
Rock, Jazz, Dance, Classic, etc.  
Creating a Playlist  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
• Play speed: set the play speed anywhere between 0.5X and  
2.0X using the slider.  
Music player  
.
2. Tap the Playlists tab.  
3. Press  
Create playlist.  
4. Type a name for this playlist in the field and tap OK  
.
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
To edit a playlist:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Adding Music to a Playlist  
Music player  
.
To add files to the playlist:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap the Playlists tab.  
2. Tap Playlists  
3. Press  
4. Tap a playlist name to edit.  
5. Tap the Name field for the selected playlist, enter a new  
name for the playlist then tap OK  
.
Music player  
.
Edit title.  
3. Tap the playlist name in which to add music.  
4. Tap Add music  
5. Tap a music file, or tap Select all to add all the music  
.
.
tracks to this playlist then tap Done  
.
For information on downloading music for your phone, see  
Removing Music from a Playlist  
To remove music files from a playlist:  
Google Play Music  
With Google Play Music, you can play music that you have  
added to your music file as well as any music you copied  
from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have  
copied from your PC.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Music player  
.
2. Tap the Playlists tab.  
3. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.  
4. Press Remove  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Play Music  
.
5. Tap the checkbox to the left of each track you want to  
2. At the Welcome screen, tap Next  
.
remove from this playlist, or tap Select all to remove all  
3. At the Select an account screen, tap an account that  
the music tracks from this playlist, then tap Remove  
.
you would like to link to Google Play Music or tap Add  
Editing a Playlist  
Account  
.
Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you  
can also rename the playlist.  
4. At the Get free music screen, tap Get free songs or Skip  
.
Multimedia  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5. Follow the on-screen instructions for getting your free  
music.  
2. All videos that you have on your memory card will be  
displayed. Tap the video that you want to play.  
The video will begin to play.  
All music on your device and external SD card is  
displayed including Music folders that may contain  
multiple songs.  
3. The following video controls are available:  
Pause the video.  
6. Tap a song to start playback.  
Start the video after being paused.  
7. From the main Play Music screen, you can tap any of  
the following tabs for a more detailed listing of songs:  
Recent, Artists, Albums, Songs, Playlists, and Genres.  
Press and hold to rewind the video. Tap to  
go to previous video.  
Press and hold to fast-forward the video.  
Tap to go to next video.  
Tap to capture a picture from the video. It  
is saved to your My Files in the All files/  
sdcard0/Pictures/Screenshots folder.  
8. Tap  
for the following options:  
• Shuffle all: allows you to play all of your music in a shuffled  
order.  
• Settings: allows you to view Open source licenses and the  
music version for the Play Music application.  
• Help: allows you to view a help file on the Google Support  
website.  
Volume control.  
PIP (Picture In Picture) view. The video will  
be played in a small window so you can use  
your phone for other purposes while watching  
the video. Double-tap screen to return to  
previous size.  
Video Player  
The Videos application plays video files stored on your phone  
or microSD card.  
1. Tap  
Video Player  
.
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Opening the Gallery  
1. Tap Gallery  
Original size view. The video will be played  
in its original size.  
.
All of the Albums that hold your pictures, videos, and  
screen captures display with a folder name and the  
number of files.  
Full-screen in ratio view. The video is  
enlarged as much as possible without  
becoming distorted.  
2. Tap an Album and thumbnails of the contents display.  
Full-screen view. The entire screen is used,  
which may cause some minor distortion.  
Note: If your phone displays a memory full message when you  
access Gallery, delete some of the files by using My Files  
or other file management applications and try again. For  
Note: The screen view icons are a three-way toggle. The icon  
that is displayed, is the mode that will appear after the  
icon is tapped.  
Viewing Pictures  
1. From the main gallery, tap Slideshow  
slideshow of all of your pictures.  
For more information on downloading videos for your phone,  
to see a  
Gallery  
2. Tap a thumbnail to view a single picture.  
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.  
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a  
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and  
share as a picture message.  
Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in  
addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to  
display them.  
Multimedia  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3. The following options are available at the top of the  
Using S Beam to Share Pictures  
screen:  
This feature (when activated via NFC) allows you to beam  
large files directly to another compatible device that is in  
direct contact. These files can be larger, such as Videos, HD  
pictures, and other large files.You can beam images and  
videos from your gallery, music files from your music player,  
and more.  
• Favorites  
• Share via  
: marks the picture as a favorite.  
: allows you to share the picture via AT&T  
Locker, Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Flipboard, Gmail, Google+,  
Messaging, Picasa, S Note or Wi-Fi Direct.  
• Delete  
4. Press  
: allows you to delete the picture.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
settings NFC  
2. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide  
the NFC slider to the right to turn it on  
Settings  
More  
for additional options.  
.
Viewing Videos  
.
ON  
Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in  
addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to  
display them.  
3. Tap S Beam and make sure the feature is turned on.  
4. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide  
the S Beam slider to the right to turn it on  
5. On the source device (containing the desired image or  
video), tap Gallery  
.
ON  
1. Tap a video to select it.  
2. Tap  
to play the video.  
.
3. Press  
for additional options.  
6. Locate and tap the selected image to open it in the  
For video player controls, see “Video Player” on  
preview window.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Important! Neither device must be in Lock mode or displaying  
the Lock screen. They must both be active and  
unlocked. It is recommended that the target device  
be on the Home screen.  
Note: If the Touch to beam screen does not appear on the  
source device:  
- Pull them apart  
- Verify the image is visible in the preview window on  
the source device (providing the file)  
- Place them together again  
Place devices back to back  
8. From the Touch to beam screen, tap the reduced image  
preview to begin the transfer (2).  
9. When prompted, separate the two devices. After a few  
seconds (depending on file size) the recipient with then  
see the transferred file displayed on their screen.  
Touch to beam  
To share multiple pictures via S Beam:  
1. On the source device (containing the desired image or  
video), tap  
Gallery  
.
2. Locate the selected folder.  
3. Touch and hold the first image and place a checkmark  
on it and all desired images.  
Tap the source image  
4. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back  
to begin.  
7. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back  
to begin (1).  
Multimedia  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. From the Touch to beam screen, tap the reduced image  
preview to begin the transfer.  
Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright  
conditions, shadows may display on the photo.  
When prompted, separate the two devices.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Camera  
to  
Camera  
activate the camera mode.  
This section explains how to use the camera on your phone.  
You can take photographs and shoot video by using the built-  
in camera functionality. Your 8 megapixel camera produces  
photos in JPEG format.  
Note: The main Home screen initially contains the Camera  
icon. If you delete it, or if you want to access the camera  
from another Home screen, you must tap Apps  
Camera  
.
Important! Do not take photos of people without their  
permission.  
2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,  
adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject.  
3. Before you take a picture, use the Up and Down Volume  
keys to zoom in or out. You can magnify the picture up  
to x4 (400 percent).  
Do not take photos in places where cameras are  
not allowed.  
Do not take photos in places where you may  
interfere with another person’s privacy.  
Using the Camera  
Taking Photos  
Taking pictures with your phone’s built-in camera is as  
simple as choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then  
pressing the camera key.  
4. Tap the screen to move the focus to the area you touch,  
and press the Camera key ( ) until the shutter  
sounds.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
(The picture is automatically stored in the designated  
storage location. If no microSD is installed, all pictures  
Pinch the screen inwards to zoom out or pinch it  
outwards to zoom in.  
7. Press  
to return to the viewfinder.  
Camera Options  
Options are represented by icons across both sides of the  
screen.  
Note: Tap  
Settings  
GPS tag  
On to enable the GPS  
icon, from the Camera screen.  
Note: The options disappear after a few seconds. Tap the  
Front  
Facing  
Camera  
screen to make them redisplay.  
Charger on Storage Location  
Mode  
Camera / Camcorder Mode: allows you to take a photo  
in various modes. Once you change the mode, the  
corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the  
display. Slide the button up for Camera, or down for  
Camcorder.  
Flash  
Camera  
Key  
Shooting  
Mode  
Effects  
Image  
Viewer  
Self-portrait: allows you to activate the front facing  
camera so you can take pictures of yourself or video  
chat.  
Settings  
Display Image  
5. To view a picture, tap the Image Viewer.  
Flash: allows you to set the flash options to Off, On, or  
Auto flash.  
6. While viewing a picture, double-tap the screen to zoom  
A
in or out.  
– or –  
Multimedia  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Shooting mode: allows you to set the shooting mode to  
one of the following:  
Smile shot: the camera focuses on the face of your  
subject. Once the camera detects the person’s  
smile, it takes the picture.  
Single shot: takes a single photo and view it before  
returning to the shooting mode.  
Cartoon: gives your photo a cartoon look.  
Face detection: double tap on a face to zoom in or  
out.  
Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply  
specialeffectstothephoto. Optionsinclude:Noeffect,  
Black and white, Sepia, and Negative.  
Panorama: takes a landscape photo by taking an  
initial photo and then adding additional images to  
itself. The guide box lets you view the area where  
the second part of the panoramic picture should  
fall within.  
Settings:  
Edit shortcuts: allows you to set shortcut icons for the  
settings that you use the most.  
Share shot: uses Wi-Fi Direct to share your  
pictures quickly with your friends.  
Self-portrait: allows you to set the front camera so you  
can take pictures of yourself.  
Buddy photo share: Set the device to recognize a  
person’s face that you have tagged in a photo and  
send it to that person. Face recognition may fail  
depending on the face angle, face size, skin  
colour, facial expression, light conditions, or  
accessories the subject is wearing.  
Flash: allows you to set the flash options to Off, On, or  
Auto flash.  
Shooting mode: allows you to set the shooting mode.  
Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply  
specialeffectstothephoto. Optionsinclude:Noeffect,  
Black and white, Sepia, and Negative.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Settings (continued):  
Whitebalance:allowsyoutosetthisoptiontooneofthe  
following choices: Auto, Daylight, Cloudy,  
Incandescent, or Fluorescent.  
Scenemode:allowsyoutosettheScenetohelptakethe  
best pictures possible. Options include None, Portrait,  
Landscape, Sports, Party/Indoor, Beach/Snow,  
Sunset, Dawn, Autumn color, Text, Candlelight,  
Firework, Backlight, and Night. Helpful tips are shown  
for each scene mode at the bottom of the display  
screen.  
ISO:ISOdetermineshowsensitivethelight meterison  
yourdigitalcamera. ChoosefromAuto, 100, 200, 400,  
or 800. Use a lower ISO number to make your camera  
less sensitive to light, a higher ISO number to take  
photos with less light, or Auto to let the camera  
automatically adjust the ISO for each of your shots.  
Exposure value: allows you to adjust the brightness  
level by moving the slider.  
Metering: allows you to set how the camera measures  
ormetersthelightsource:Matrix,Center-weighted,or  
Spot.  
Focus mode:allows you to set this option to Auto focus  
or Macro. Use Macro mode to take close-up pictures.  
Outdoor visibility: allows you to maximize your photos  
taken while outdoors.  
Timer: allows you to set a timer for how long to wait  
before taking a picture. Options include: Off, 2 sec, 5  
sec, and 10 sec.  
Auto contrast: provides a clear image even under  
backlight circumstances where intensity of  
illumination can vary excessively.  
Resolution: allows you to set the image size to either:  
8M (3264x2448), W6.5M (3264x1968),  
3.2M (2048x1536), W2.4M (2048x1232),  
W0.4M (800x480), or 0.3M (640x480).  
Guidelines: allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off.  
Anti-Shake: reduces image blur due to the movement  
of the subject of the photo or hand movement.  
Multimedia  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Settings (continued):  
Reset: allows you to reset all camera or camcorder  
settings to the default values.  
GPS tag: allows you to turn GPS On or Off (also known  
as Geotagging). The location of where the picture is  
taken is attached to the picture. (Only available in  
Camera mode.) Before you can use the GPS tag  
Image viewer: allows you to access the Image viewer  
and the various viewing options for a selected picture.  
Image viewer options are described in the following  
section. The last picture you took, will be displayed as  
a thumbnail in the Image viewer icon.  
(Geotagging), from the Home screen tap  
Settings Locationservices andtapUseGPSsatellites  
to create a checkmark.  
Shuttersound:allowsyoutosettheShuttersoundtoOn  
or Off.  
Viewing your Pictures  
After you take a photo, you can access various options from  
the Image Viewer. The Image Viewer uses your Gallery. For  
Contextual filename: allows you to have your location  
added as part of the filename. You must first activate  
GPS tag described above.  
Using the Camcorder  
In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a  
camcorder that also allows you to record, view, and send  
videos.  
Save as flipped: when set to On, this option allows you  
to take and save a mirror-image photo.  
Image quality: allows you to set the image quality to:  
Superfine, Fine, or Normal.  
Storage: allows you to configure the default storage  
location for images or videos as either Phone or  
Memory card (if inserted).  
Note: The camera may not be able to properly record videos to  
a memory card with a slow transfer speed.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8. Once the file is saved, tap the image viewer, then tap  
Shooting Video  
to play your video for review.  
Tip: When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright  
conditions, it is recommended that you provide your  
subject with sufficient light by having the light source  
behind you.  
9. Press  
to return to the viewer.  
Camcorder Options  
Options are represented by icons across both sides of the  
screen.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Camera  
to  
Note: The options disappear after a few seconds. Tap the  
activate the camera mode.  
screen to make them reappear.  
2. Tap and slide the Camera mode button down to  
Camcorder Mode.  
3. Tap the Recording mode that you prefer. Choose  
between Normal, or Limit for MMS.  
Camera / Camcorder Mode: allows you to take a photo  
in various modes. Once you change the mode, the  
corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the  
display. Slide the button up for Camera, or down for  
Camcorder.  
4. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,  
adjust the image by aiming the camcorder at the  
subject.  
5. Tap the Video key ( ) to begin shooting video. The red  
light will blink while recording.  
Self portrait: allows you to activate the front facing  
camerasoyoucantakevideosofyourselforvideochat.  
6. Tap the Pause key ( ) to pause the recording.  
7. Tap the Stop key ( ) to stop the recording and save  
the video file to your Camera folder.  
Flash: allows you to set the flash options to Off or On.  
When you set the flash to On, it stays on continually  
while you are taking a video.  
Multimedia  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Recording mode: allows you to set the recording mode  
to: Normal, which is limited only by available space on  
the destination location and to Limit for MMS, which is  
limited by MMS size restrictions.  
Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply  
specialeffectstothephoto. Optionsinclude:Noeffect,  
Black and white, Sepia, and Negative.  
Exposure value: allows you to adjust the brightness  
level by moving the slider.  
Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply  
specialeffectstothephoto. Optionsinclude:Noeffect,  
Black and white, Sepia, and Negative.  
Timer: allows you to set a timer for how long to wait  
beforetakingavideo.Optionsinclude:Off,2sec,5sec,  
and10sec.Resolution:allowsyoutosettheimagesize  
to either: 1920x1080, 1280x720, 720x480, 640x480,  
320x240, or 176x144.  
Settings:  
Edit shortcuts: allows you to set shortcut icons for the  
settings that you use the most.  
Whitebalance:allowsyoutosetthisoptiontooneofthe  
following choices: Auto, Daylight, Cloudy,  
Incandescent, or Fluorescent.  
Self-recording: allows you to set the front camera so  
you can take videos of yourself or video chat.  
Outdoor visibility: allows you to maximize your photos  
taken while outdoors.  
Flash: allows you to set the flash options to Off or On.  
When you set the flash to On, it stays on continually  
while you are taking a video.  
Guidelines: allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off.  
Recording mode: allows you to set the recording mode  
to: Normal, which is limited only by available space on  
the destination location or Limit for MMS, which is  
limited by MMS size restrictions.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Settings (continued):  
Image viewer: allows you to access the Image viewer  
and the various viewing options for a selected video.  
Image viewer options are described in the following  
section. The last video you took, displays as a  
thumbnail in the Image viewer icon.  
GPS tag: allows you to turn GPS On or Off (also known  
as Geotagging). The location of where the picture is  
taken is attached to the picture. (Only available in  
Camera mode.) Before you can use the GPS tag  
(Geotagging), from the Home screen tap  
Settings Locationservices andtapUseGPSsatellites  
to create a checkmark.  
Viewing your Videos  
After you take a video, you can access various options from  
the Image Viewer. The Image Viewer uses your Gallery and  
Contextualfilename:(requiresGPStagging)allowsyou  
toadjustthefilenamebasedoncontextualinformation  
such as your current GPS location.  
Save as flipped: when set to On, this option allows you  
totakeandsaveamirror-imagevideowhenusingself-  
recording mode.  
Video quality: allows you to set the image quality to:  
Superfine, Fine, or Normal.  
Storage: allows you to configure the default storage  
location for images or videos as either Phone or  
Memory card (if inserted).  
Reset: allows you to reset all camera or camcorder  
settings to the default values.  
Multimedia  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 7: Messaging  
This section describes how to send and receive different  
types of messages. It also includes the features and  
functionality associated with messaging.  
Important! When creating a message, adding an image, a  
sound file, or a video clip to a text message  
changes the message from a text message to a  
multimedia message.  
Types of Messages  
Your phone provides the following message types:  
Text Messages  
Messaging icons are displayed at the top of the screen and  
indicate when messages are received and their type. For  
Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages  
Email and Gmail Messages  
Google Talk  
Creating and Sending Messages  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
Google + and Messenger  
ChatON  
Compose  
.
The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive  
text messages to and from other mobile phones or email  
addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to  
your service provider’s message service.  
Note: The main Home screen initially contains the Messaging  
icon. If you delete it, or if you want to access  
Messaging from another Home screen, you must tap  
Applications  
Messaging  
.
The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and  
receive multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and  
audio messages) to and from other mobile phones or email  
addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to  
your service provider’s multimedia message service.  
2. Tap on the Enter recipient field to manually enter a  
recipient or tap to select a recipient from your  
Groups, Favorites, Contacts, or Logs.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3. If adding a recipient from your Contacts, tap the  
contact to place a checkmark then tap Done  
Message Options  
.
Options before composing a message  
The contact will be placed in the recipient field.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
.
2. Before composing a message, press  
to reveal  
Note: For the Group option, if the number of recipients is less  
than 10, all members in the group will be added. You will  
need to delete any unnecessary members in the list by  
selecting the trash can icon and deleting unwanted  
entries.  
additional messaging options:  
• Search: allows you to search through all of your messages for  
a certain word or string of words. Enter a search string in the  
Messaging Search window and tap  
.
• Delete threads: allows you to delete any message thread.  
Select the messages to delete and a green checkmark will  
Note: Enter additional recipients by separating each entry with  
appear next to the message. Tap Delete  
.
a semicolon (;) then using the previous procedure.  
• Draft messages: displays the draft messages folder and its  
contents.  
4. Tap the Enter message field and use the on-screen  
keypad to enter a message.  
• Scheduled messages: displays the scheduled messages  
folder and its contents.  
5. Add more recipients by tapping the recipient field.  
• Locked messages: displays the locked messages folder and  
its contents.  
6. Review your message and tap Send  
.
Note: If you exit a message before you send it, it will be  
• Spam messages: displays the spam messages folder and its  
contents.  
automatically saved as a draft.  
• Settings: allows you to access Messaging settings. For more  
Messaging  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
101  
                   
• Delete messages: allows you to delete the message.  
• Register number as spam: allows you to register the number  
as spam.  
Options while composing a message  
1. While composing a message, press  
to reveal  
additional messaging options.  
• Call: allows you to call the contact. This option only appears if  
you have entered a phone number for the recipient.  
• Insert smiley: allows you to add emoticons, such as a happy  
face to your message.  
• Unregister as spam number: allows you to unregister a  
number from the spam number list. This option only appears if  
the number was previously registered as spam.  
• Discard: allows you to delete the message.  
• Add text: allows you to copy text from your contacts, calendar,  
or from a memo to add to your message. This is a convenient  
feature for adding names, phone numbers, events, etc. to your  
message. For more information, refer to “Adding  
Additional Text” on page 103.  
Adding attachments to a message  
To add an attachment to your message, tap  
one of the following options:  
and select  
Images: allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures  
list to add it to your message.  
• Add to Contacts: allows you to add the recipient to your  
Contacts list. This option only appears if the recipient is not  
already in your Contacts list.  
Take picture: allows you to temporarily exit the message, take a  
photo with phone’s camera, and then add it to your message by  
tapping Save  
Video: allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos list,  
then add it to your message  
.
• View contact: allows you to see information on the recipient.  
This option only appears if the recipient is in your Contacts list.  
• Add slide: allows you to add a new page to a message.  
• Add recipients: allows you to add additional recipients.  
• Scheduled message: allows you to schedule a time and date  
for the message to be automatically sent.  
.
Record video: allows you to temporarily exit the message,  
record a video clip using the phone’s camera, and then add it  
to your message by tapping Save  
.
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the  
Audio list, then add it to your message by tapping the circle to  
the right of the audio so that it turns green, then tapping Done  
Record audio: allows you to temporarily exit the message and  
record an audio clip using the phone’s microphone. It is then  
automatically attached to the message.  
• Location: allows you to add an address and the link to the  
location on Google Maps.  
.
• Contacts: allows you to add the name and phone number of  
any of your contacts to your message.  
Text templates: allows you to add pre-defined phrases and  
sentences.  
S Note: allows you to add an S Note that you have created.  
Calendar: allows you to add an event from your calendar. Select  
3. Tap the information you want to send.  
The text is added to your message.  
the desired event and tap Done  
.
Viewing New Received Messages  
1. When you receive a new message, the new message  
icon will appear at the top of your screen.  
2. Open the Notification Bar and select the message. For  
Location: allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing  
your location.  
Contacts: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry,  
then add it to your message by tapping Done  
.
Adding Additional Text  
You can copy text such as names, phone numbers, and  
events from your Contacts, Calendar or a Memo.  
– or –  
From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
tap the new message to view it.  
then  
1. While composing a message, press  
Add text.  
2. At the Add text screen, select one of the following:  
• S Note: allows you to insert text from an existing S Note.  
• Calendar: allows you to add the name, date, and time of a  
calendar event to your message.  
The selected message appears in the display.  
3. To play a multimedia message, tap  
.
To pause playback of the multimedia message, tap  
.
103  
Messaging  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. To scroll through the message (if additional text pages  
have been added), touch the screen and in a single  
motion, scroll up or down the page.  
• Delete thread: displays a confirmation dialog box that when  
pressed, deletes the entire thread.  
• Register number as spam: allows you to register the number  
as spam.  
Message Threads  
• Unregister as spam number: allows you to unregister a  
number from the spam number list. This option only appears if  
the number was previously registered as spam.  
Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped  
into message threads. Threaded messages allow you to see  
all the messages exchanged (similar to a chat program) and  
displays a contact on the screen. Message threads are listed  
in the order in which they were received, with the latest  
message displayed at the top.  
Deleting Messages  
Deleting a single message thread  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
.
To open a threaded message follow these steps:  
2. Touch and hold a message, then tap Delete thread  
.
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
.
3. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to  
Tap the message thread you want to view.  
cancel.  
2. Touch and hold the message thread to display the  
following options:  
Deleting multiple message threads  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
.
• View contact: displays the contact’s information. This option  
only displays if the sender is in your Contacts list.  
• Add to Contacts: displays the Contacts information screen.  
This option only displays if the sender is not in your Contacts  
list.  
2. Press  
Delete threads.  
3. Tap each message you want to delete. A checkmark  
will appear beside each message you select.  
4. Tap Delete  
.
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. At the Delete prompt, tap Delete to delete or Cancel to  
• Background style: allows you to choose from several  
background styles for your messages.  
cancel.  
• Split view: when in Landscape mode, allows you to view both  
the message list and the contents of the currently selected  
message.  
Message Search  
You can search through your messages by using the  
Message Search feature.  
• Use the volume key: allows you to change the text size by  
using the up or down volume keys.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
2. Tap Search  
3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase to  
search for, then tap  
.
.
General settings:  
.
• Delete old messages: deletes old messages when the limit is  
reached, rather than having them overwritten.  
4. All messages that contain the search string you  
entered are displayed.  
Text message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many text  
messages can be in one conversation.  
Messaging Settings  
To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia  
messages, Voice mails, and Push messages.  
• Multimedia message limit: allows you to set a limit on how  
many multimedia messages can be in one conversation.  
Text templates: allows you to edit or add new text templates to  
use in your messaging.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
Settings.  
2. The following Messaging settings are available:  
Text message (SMS) settings:  
Display:  
• Manage SIM card messages: allows you to manage the  
messages that you have stored on your SIM card.  
• Bubble style: allows you to choose from several bubble styles  
for your messages. Bubbles are the rounded boxes that  
surround each message.  
Messaging  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
105  
         
• Message center: allows you to enter the number of your  
Message center where your messages reside while the system  
is attempting to deliver them.  
Push message settings:  
• Push messages: allows you to receive push messages from  
the network.  
• Input mode: allows you to set the input mode for your text  
messages. Choose between GSM Alphabet, Unicode, or  
Automatic.  
Cell Broadcast (CB) settings:  
• CB activation: allows you to receive Cell Broadcast (CB)  
messages.  
Multimedia message (MMS) settings:  
• Channel configuration: allows you to set up the channel that  
you will receive CB messages on.  
• Auto-retrieve: allows the message system to retrieve  
messages automatically.  
Notifications settings:  
• Creation mode: allows you to select the creation mode, Free,  
Restricted, or Warning.  
• Notifications: allows you to see message notifications on your  
status bar.  
Restricted: you can only create and submit messages with  
content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain.  
Warning: the phone will warn you via pop up messages that  
you are creating a multimedia message which does not fit the  
Core MM Content Domain.  
• Select ringtone: allows you to set the ringtone for your  
message notifications.  
• Vibrate: allows you to configure the vibration mode associated  
with message alerts.  
• Message alert repetition: allows you to set the interval for new  
message alerts. Choose from: Once, Every 2 minutes, or Every  
10 minutes.  
Free: you may add any content to the message.  
• MMS alert: allows you to receive an alert when MMS mode  
becomes active.  
• Preview message: when enabled, allows you to view a  
preview of new message text on the Status bar.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Signature settings:  
Creating an Email Account  
1. From the Home screen, tap Email  
.
• Add signature: when enabled, this feature allows you to create  
a signature at the end of your outgoing text messages.  
• Signature text: allows you to enter a desired signature for your  
message.  
Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup  
screen displayed.  
2. Enter you email address in the Email address field.  
3. Enter your password in the Password field.  
4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed,  
tap Show password to create a checkmark.  
Spam message settings:  
• Spam settings: when enabled, allows you to configure  
available spam settings such as:  
5. Tap Next  
.
• Register number as spam: allows you to manually enter and  
assign a phone number as being sent from a spam source.  
• Register phrase as spam: allows you to assign a specific text  
phrase as belonging to a spam message. Ex: Dear friend.  
• Block unknown senders: when active, automatically blocks  
incoming messages from unknown sources or blocked numbers.  
6. Enter an account name for this email account  
(optional).  
7. Tap Done  
.
Synchronizing a Corporate Email Account  
Use the following procedure to configure your phone to  
synchronize with a corporate email account.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Email  
Using Email  
Email enables you to review and create email using various  
email services. You can also receive text message alerts  
when you receive an important email.  
.
Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup  
screen displayed.  
2. Enter you email address in the Email address field.  
3. Enter your password in the Password field.  
Messaging  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
107  
                     
4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed,  
2. Press  
Settings  
then enter the  
tap Show password to create a checkmark.  
information required to set up another account. For  
more information, refer to “Creating an Email Account”  
on page 107.  
5. Scroll down and tap Manual setup  
.
6. Tap the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync field.  
Switching Between Email Accounts  
7. Enter all the Exchange server information, Domain,  
Username and Password, then tap Next  
8. At the prompt tap OK  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap Email  
.
.
Your Email screen displays showing your emails from  
the active account.  
The Account options screen is displayed.  
2. Tap the box at the top of your screen that displays the  
optional name you assigned to your first email account,  
for example, Work, Gmail, etc.  
9. Enter the desired information in the different fields,  
then tap Next  
.
10. Enter an Account name for this account (Optional).  
Your Email account screen is displayed.  
Wait for the Inbox to synchronize before use.  
11. Tap Done  
.
3. In the Accounts section, tap the Email account you  
would like to switch to. You can also select Combined  
view which will display email messages from all  
accounts.  
12. Press  
More  
Account Settings to change the  
account settings.  
Creating Additional Email Accounts  
To create additional email accounts after setting up your first  
4. The new Email account is displayed.  
account, follow these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap Email  
.
Your Email screen displays showing your emails from  
the active account.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Tap  
copy.  
and select Add Cc/Bcc to add a carbon or blind  
Using Gmail  
Gmail is Google’s web-based email. When you first setup the  
phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the  
synchronization settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized  
with your Gmail account.  
4. Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field.  
5. Tap the Compose email field and begin composing your  
message.  
Signing into Your Gmail  
6. Tap  
to send.  
Viewing a Gmail Message  
Note: You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to  
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap a message to view it.  
2. The following options are available at the bottom of the  
screen:  
access Gmail.  
1. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already  
• Archive  
: archives the selected message.  
• Delete : deletes the message.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Gmail  
.
• Labels  
: allows you to attach labels to a message. This is  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
similar to putting it in a folder.  
The Inbox loads conversations and email.  
• Mark Unread  
: after reading a message, marks as unread.  
Creating a Gmail Message  
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap  
• Newer: swipe your screen to the right to see newer messages.  
• Older: swipe your screen to the left to see older messages.  
at the bottom of the  
screen to create a new message.  
3. Before selecting a message, press  
to select one of  
2. Enter the recipients Email address in the To field.  
Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a  
comma.  
the following additional options:  
• Label settings: allows you to set sync and notification settings.  
• Settings: displays Email settings that you can modify.  
Messaging  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
109  
       
• Help: displays the Google.com webpage so you can search the  
web for help.  
Other Gmail Options  
1. Tap at the bottom of the screen to refresh the  
screen, send and receive new emails, and synchronize  
your email with the Gmail account.  
2. Tap at the bottom of the screen to set up and  
manage Labels for your Gmail messages.  
3. Tap at the bottom of the screen to search through  
your Gmail messages.  
• Send feedback: allows you to send feedback or report a  
problem.  
4. After selecting a message, press  
to select one of  
the following additional options:  
• Mark important/not important: allows you to set the  
importance of a message.  
• Mute: allows you to mute the sound in a message if applicable.  
• Report spam: allows you to report a message as spam. Tap  
the UNDO option if you change your mind.  
Google Talk  
Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based application for  
instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are  
automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account.  
This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your  
Gmail accounts.  
• Report phishing: allows you to report a message that you feel  
is trying to improperly get information from you.  
• Settings: displays Email settings that you can modify.  
• Send feedback: allows you to send feedback or report a  
problem.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Talk  
.
3. Begin using Google Talk.  
• Help: displays the Google.com webpage so you can search the  
web for help.  
Note: If you have already signed into an IM account, it is  
displayed on the Talk application screen.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,  
Google +  
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a  
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream  
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast  
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant  
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your  
own private album on Google+.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Messenger  
.
– or –  
From the Google+ application, select Messenger  
.
3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to  
Google+.  
– or –  
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,  
Tap Create a new account to create another account.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Google+  
.
3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to  
4. At the Messenger screen, tap  
to start a new  
Google+.  
– or –  
message.  
5. In the upper text field, enter a name, email address, or  
circle.  
Tap Add account to create another account.  
6. In the bottom message field, enter a message then tap  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google+.  
.
5. Visit www.google.com/mobile/+/ for more information.  
7. From the Messenger screen, tap Learn more for more  
Messenger  
detailed information.  
Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into  
a simple group conversation. When you get a new  
conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your  
phone.  
Messaging  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
111  
       
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to use the Messages  
Messages App  
AT&T Messages brings your texts, calls, and voicemail  
messages together into a single conversation thread and is  
accessible by phone or computer.  
app.  
ChatON  
Provides a global mobile communication service where you  
can chat with more than 2 buddies via a group chat. Share  
things such as pictures, videos, animation messages  
(Scribbles), audio, Contacts, Calendar entries, and Location  
information.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Messages  
.
2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already  
For more information, visit: https://web.samsungchaton.com  
1. From the Home screen, tap ChatON  
2. Read the on-screen notification about data charges  
and tap OK  
.
Note: The first time you use the Messages app, you will need  
.
to download the updated application from the Play  
Store. When the Play Store page displays, tap Update  
.
.
3. Select either the Terms and conditions or Privacy policy  
and read the on-screen information. Tap Accept to  
continue.  
3. At the Welcome screen, read the information and tap  
Continue or tap Learn More to receive more  
information.  
4. Select a country code, enter your current phone  
number to register with the service, and tap Done  
.
5. Choose to receive the verification code via either SMS  
4. The first time you use Messages, you will need to set  
up a few things. Tap Record Greeting to record a  
personal greeting, or tap Skip if you want to do it later.  
(text message) or Voice to your device.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Note: If you opt to receive the verification code via SMS, this  
information is sent directly to your device. Once  
received, the Verification field is automatically filled in.  
6. Enter your real name and tap  
OK.  
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to add a buddy and  
begin your chat session.  
Messaging  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
113  
Section 8: Changing Your Settings  
This section explains the settings used for customizing your  
device.  
Activating Wi-Fi Direct  
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can  
Accessing Settings  
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi  
Direct field, to turn Wi-Fi Direct ON  
Settings  
Wi-Fi.  
From any Home screen, tap  
Settings.  
– or –  
.
ON  
From any Home screen, press  
The Settings screen displays.  
Settings.  
3. At the bottom of the Wi-Fi screen, tap the Wi-Fi Direct  
button.  
Wi-Fi Settings  
This section describes the Wi-Fi settings. For information on  
Advanced Wi-Fi Settings  
The advanced Wi-Fi settings allow you to set up and manage  
wireless access points.  
Activating Wi-Fi  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Wi-Fi.  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi  
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Advanced  
The following options are available:  
Settings  
Wi-Fi.  
.
ON  
.
3. Tap Scan to scan for available Wi-Fi networks. For more  
• Network notification: alerts you when a new WAP is available.  
• Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep: allows you to specify when to  
disconnect from Wi-Fi.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
• Auto connect: allows you to be automatically connected to an  
AT&T Wi-Fi Hotspot as soon as your phone detects it.  
• MAC address: view your device’s MAC address, required  
when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).  
• IP address: view your device’s IP address.  
2. Tap Scan to scan for nearby discoverable devices. After  
searching, tap a device to pair with it. For more  
3. Tap  
and select a Bluetooth setting to configure:  
• Rename device: Your device’s default name displays on  
screen. Tap to change the device name. Available when  
Bluetooth is turned On.  
Bluetooth settings  
In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a  
device name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices  
can discover it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices  
with which to pair.  
• Visibility timeout: Use this setting to control when to  
automatically turn off the Discoverable option: 2 minutes, 5  
minutes, 1 hour, or Never timeout.  
Activating Bluetooth  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
• Received files: Show the list of files received by using  
Bluetooth.  
Settings.  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the  
Data Usage  
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON  
.
ON  
From this screen you can view your Mobile data usage and  
turn your Mobile data capability On or Off.  
Additional Bluetooth Settings  
When Bluetooth is on, additional settings are available.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Settings  
Bluetooth  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
usage  
Settings  
Data  
.
.
2. Tap Mobile data to create a checkmark and turn Mobile  
data usage on.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
115  
   
3. Tap Set mobile data limit to create a checkmark and  
allow a data limit to be set.  
More Settings  
This tab displays additional wireless and network  
information.  
4. Touch and drag the red limit bar to the GB limit that you  
desire.  
From the Home screen, tap  
settings  
Settings  
More  
5. Tap the Data usage cycle drop-down menu and select a  
date.  
.
Options display for Airplane mode, USB Utilities, Mobile  
networks, Tethering and portable hotspots, VPN, NFC,  
S Beam, Nearby devices, and Kies via Wi-Fi.  
The data usage displays as a visual (chart) and also  
displays a list of each application with a breakdown of  
how much data was used per application.  
Airplane mode  
Airplane mode allows you to use many of your phone’s  
features, such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are  
in an airplane or in any other area where making or receiving  
calls or data is prohibited.  
Note: Data is measured by your device. Your service provider  
may account for data usage differently.  
6. Press  
to display additional options. Tap to activate.  
• Data roaming: enables Data roaming on your device.  
• Restrict background data: restricts some apps and services  
from working unless you are connected to a Wi-Fi network.  
• Auto-sync data: allows your accounts to automatically sync  
• Show Wi-Fi usage: displays a Wi-Fi tab that shows Wi-Fi  
usage.  
Important! When your phone is in Airplane Mode, it cannot  
send or receive any calls or access online  
information or applications.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
settings  
Settings  
More  
.
• Mobile hotspots: displays available mobile hotspots.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2. Tap Airplane mode. A check mark displayed next to the  
2. Tap Mobile data to create a checkmark and activate the  
feature indicates Airplane mode is active. The Airplane  
feature.  
mode icon  
is displayed at the top of your screen.  
Data Roaming  
Data roaming allows you to connect to your service  
provider’s partner networks and access data services when  
you are out of your service providers area of coverage.  
USB utilities  
This option allows you to copy files between your PC and the  
memory card in your phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
settings Mobile networks  
Settings  
More  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
settings USB utilities  
2. Connect your phone to your PC using a USB cable.  
3. Tap Connect storage to PC  
Settings  
More  
.
.
2. Tap Data roaming to create a checkmark and activate  
the feature.  
.
Access Point Names  
To use Wi-Fi you need access to a wireless access point  
(hotspot).  
4. From your PC, open the folder to view your files.  
5. Copy files between your PC and the memory card.  
Mobile networks  
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find  
your location or search for places of interest, you must  
enable the Mobile networks options.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
settings Mobile networks  
2. Tap Access Point Names  
Settings  
More  
.
.
A list of the Access Point names display. The active  
access point displays a green, filled circle to the right  
of the name.  
Use Mobile Data  
To activate the data network, this option must be selected. It  
is set on by default.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
settings Mobile networks  
Settings  
More  
.
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
117  
   
Network Operators  
Default setup options  
Using this feature you can view the current network  
connection. You can also scan and select a network operator  
manually, or set the network selection to Automatic.  
Your phone default is set to Automatic (to automatically  
search for an available network. You can set this option to  
Manual to select a network each time you connect.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
settings Mobile networks  
2. Tap Network operators  
Settings  
More  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Wireless and network Mobile networks  
2. Tap Network operators  
3. Tap Default setup  
Settings  
.
.
.
.
The current network connection displays at the bottom  
of the list.  
.
4. Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network  
manually, or tap Automatic to allow the device to  
automatically select a network.  
Important! You must deactivate data service prior to searching  
for an available network.  
Tethering & portable hotspot  
3. Tap Search networks to manually search for a network.  
4. Tap Select automatically to automatically select a  
network connection.  
This option allows you to share your phones’s mobile data  
connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot.  
USB Tethering  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
More  
Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer  
settings Tethering and portable hotspots  
.
speed and time.  
2. Connect your phone to your PC using a USB cable.  
3. Tap USB tethering to add a checkmark and activate the  
feature. The USB tethering icon  
top of your screen.  
is displayed at the  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Portable Wi-Fi hotspot  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Find Galaxy Note_XXXX in the Wi-Fi network list and  
connect to it. XXXX are four randomly generated digits  
that will appear when you set up a Portable Wi-Fi  
hotspot on your device.  
Settings  
More  
settings  
Hotspot  
2. Turn Mobile Hotspot on by tapping the slider so that it  
Tethering and portable hotspots  
Mobile  
.
The connected device can now use internet through  
your Portable Wi-Fi hotspot.  
changes to the ON position  
The Mobile hotspot icon  
your screen.  
.
ON  
is displayed at the top of  
Note: Activating Wi-Fi and connecting to your phone will be  
different depending on the type of the other device.  
3. Tap Configure  
.
4. Enter or edit the Network SSID, Hide my device,  
Security setting and Password.  
Help  
From the Tethering and portable hotspot menu, tap Help  
5. Tap Show password and Show advanced options to see  
them displayed.  
for additional information.  
VPN settings  
The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage  
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs).  
6. Tap Save  
.
Connecting to Portable Wi-Fi hotspot from other  
devices  
1. Activate Wi-Fi on the device that wants to connect to  
Important! Before you can use a VPN you must establish and  
configure one.  
your phone.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
119  
   
IPSec Xauth RSA  
IPSec Hybrid RSA  
Adding a Basic VPN  
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN  
protocol to use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol),  
L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol), L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-  
shared key based L2TP/IPSec), or L2TP/IPSec CRT  
(Certificate based L2TP/IPSec).  
1. Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock  
7. Enter the Server address and any other required fields  
that are dependent upon the Type you entered  
previously.  
8. Tap the PPP encryption (MPPE) check box to use the  
MPPE protocol for encryption.  
9. Tap the Show advanced options check box to display  
additional VPN options.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
settings VPN  
3. Tap Basic VPN  
4. Tap Add VPN network  
Settings  
More  
10. Tap Save to save your VPN settings.  
.
Adding an IPsec VPN  
1. Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock  
.
.
5. Enter a name for the VPN network in the Name field.  
6. Select a VPN type from the Type drop-down menu. The  
options are:  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
settings VPN  
3. Tap Advanced IPsec VPN  
4. Tap Add VPN connection  
Settings  
More  
.
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)  
L2TP/IPSec PSK (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol / Internet Protocol  
Security Pre-Shared Key)  
.
.
5. Enter a password, confirm the password, and tap OK  
6. Enter a name for the VPN connection in the VPN  
connection name field.  
.
L2TP/IPSec RSA  
IPSec Xauth PSK  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Select an IPsec connection type from the drop-down  
menu.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
settings S Beam  
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn S Beam on  
Settings  
More  
.
8. Enter any other required information.  
9. Tap the Show advanced options button to display  
additional VPN options.  
.
ON  
3. Touch the back of your device with another NFC-  
capable device and the content is transferred.  
10. Tap Save to save your VPN settings.  
Nearby devices  
NFC  
This option allows you to share your media files with nearby  
devices using DLNA and connected to the same Wi-Fi.  
1. Connect to a Wi-Fi network. For more information, refer  
NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when  
you touch your device with another compatible device. This  
is used for applications such as Android Beam.  
To activate NFC, follow these steps:  
2. Verify Wi-Fi Direct is enabled and you are paired with  
the device in which to detect and share content.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
settings  
Settings  
More  
.
2. Tap NFC to create a checkmark and activate the  
feature.  
3. From the Home screen, tap  
settings Nearby devices  
Settings  
More  
.
S Beam  
4. Tap File sharing to create a checkmark and turn File  
When S Beam is activated, you can beam files to another  
NFC-capable device by holding the devices close together.  
You can beam images and videos from your gallery, music  
files from your music player, and more.  
sharing on.  
5. Verify  
(Nearby devices) appears at the top of the  
screen.  
6. At the Nearby devices prompt, tap OK  
.
Changing Your Settings  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7. Tap Shared contents, then check the media you would  
like to share. Tap OK  
8. Tap Device name, then use the on-screen keyboard to  
change the name shown to others. Tap Save  
1. From your PC, download the Samsung Kies application  
.
if you don’t already have it. You can find it at  
.
.
2. From your PC, launch the Samsung Kies application.  
9. Tap Allowed devices list, then select the connected  
devices you would like to allow.  
3. From your PC, connect to a Wi-Fi network.  
4. From the Home screen, tap  
settings Kies via Wi-Fi  
Settings  
More  
10. Tap Not-allowed devices list, then select the connected  
devices you would like to not allow.  
.
From your device, connect to the same Wi-Fi network that your  
PC is connected to if you have not already done so. For more  
11. Tap Download to, then select the destination of any  
downloaded (shared) content. Choose from USB  
storage (phone) or SD card.  
Home screen mode  
12. Tap Upload from other devices, then select the actions  
you’ll take when you upload content from other  
devices. Choose from either Always accept, Always  
ask, or Always reject.  
Home screen mode allows you to set your display to the  
conventional layout of Basic mode or provide an easier user  
experience for the first-time smartphone users using Easy  
mode  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
screen mode  
2. Tap one of the following options:  
.
Settings  
Home  
Kies via Wi-Fi  
.
Kies via Wi-Fi allows you to sync your PC wirelessly with your  
device provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi network.  
You can view and share videos, photos, music, ringtones,  
and more.  
• Basic mode: provides conventional layout for the apps and  
widgets on your home screens.  
• Easy mode: provides easier user experience for first-time  
smartphone users on the home screens.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3. Tap Apply  
.
5. Tap Allowed contacts to assign those contacts that are  
exempted from these rules. Choose from None, All  
contacts, Favorites, or Custom. Allowed contacts will  
Blocking Mode  
When Blocking mode is enabled, notifications for selected  
features will be disabled. You will only receive notifications of  
incoming calls from people on your allowed list.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Blocking mode  
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Blocking mode  
slider to the right to turn it on  
then appear in the Allowed contact list  
.
Sound Settings  
From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone.  
Settings  
.
From the Home screen, tap Settings Sound.  
The following options display:  
.
ON  
Volume  
Confirm that the Blocking mode active icon  
appears in the Status bar.  
The Volume option allows you to change the volume for all  
phone sounds in one easy location.  
3. Place a green checkmark adjacent to those features  
you would like to enable. Choose from: Disable  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Volume  
Settings  
Sound  
.
incoming calls  
,
Disable notifications, and Disable alarm  
2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the sound volume  
for Music, video, games and other media, Ringtone,  
Notifications, and System.  
and timer  
.
4. Configure a timeframe for these features to be active.  
Remove the checkmark from the Always field to  
configure the From and To time fields.  
3. Tap OK  
.
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
123  
         
5. If you always want to use this selection as the default  
choice, tap Always, otherwise tap Just once  
Vibration intensity  
Vibration intensity allows you to select how intense the  
.
vibration is for different options.  
6. Select a song and tap OK  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Vibration intensity  
Settings  
Sound  
Device vibration  
This option allows you to set your phone to vibrate and ring.  
.
2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the Vibration  
intensity for Incoming call, Notification, and Haptic  
feedback.  
You can use an existing device vibration or create your own.  
To use an existing vibration:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Device vibration  
Settings  
Sound  
.
.
Device ringtone  
This option allows you to set the ringtone using existing  
ringtones or using your own music.  
.
3. Select a vibration pattern and tap OK  
.
To create your own vibration:  
To use an existing ringtone:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Device vibration  
3. Tap Create  
Settings  
Sound  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Device ringtone  
Settings  
Settings  
Sound  
.
.
.
.
.
3. Tap a listed ringtone and tap OK  
.
A circle is displayed with Tap to create in the center.  
To use your own music:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
4. Tap in the center of the circle to start.  
Sound  
5. A line will start to move around the circle much like the  
second hand on a clock. Tap whenever you want to add  
a vibration. You can press and hold to add a long  
vibration.  
2. Tap Device ringtone  
3. Tap Add  
4. Tap Choose music track or Music Player  
.
.
.
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. Press Stop to end or wait for it to complete one  
System Tone Settings  
The System tone settings are used when you use the dialing  
pad, make a screen selection, lock your screen, or tap the  
screen.  
revolution of the circle.  
7. Tap  
to play back the vibration you just created.  
8. Tap Save to save or Cancel to start over.  
9. Enter a Vibration pattern name and tap OK  
10.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Sound.  
.
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark  
and activate the feature:  
Default notifications  
This option allows you to set the ringtone that will sound for  
notifications and alarms.  
• Keytones: makes a sound when you tap a key on the  
keyboard.  
Touch sounds: makes a sound when you touch the screen.  
• Screen lock sound: makes a sound when your screen is  
locked or unlocked.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Default notifications  
Settings  
Sound  
.
.
3. Tap a ringtone and tap OK  
.
• Haptic feedback: makes a vibration when you tap soft keys  
and on certain UI interactions.  
Vibrate when ringing  
This option allows you to enable your phone to vibrate  
whenever it rings.  
Display Settings  
In this menu, you can change various settings for the display  
such as the font, orientation, pop-up notifications, puzzle  
lock feature, animation, brightness, screen timeout, power  
saving mode, and tv out settings.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Sound  
.
2. Tap Vibrate when ringing to create a checkmark and  
enable the feature.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Display.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
125  
 
The following options display:  
• Auto adjust screen tone: allows you to save power because  
the phone analyzes the displayed screen image and adjusts the  
LCD brightness.  
• Wallpaper: allows you to set the Wallpaper for your Home  
screen, Lock screen, or both.  
Storage  
• Brightness: configures the LCD Brightness levels. Drag the  
slider to adjust the brightness and tap OK. Or, tap Automatic  
brightness to have your brightness level automatically adjusted  
by your phone based on current light conditions.  
• Auto-rotate screen: allows you to switch the display  
orientation automatically when you rotate the phone.  
• Screen timeout: adjusts the delay time before the screen  
automatically turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds, 30  
seconds, 1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, and 10 minutes.  
• Font style: allows you to set the font style that your phone will  
use. You can also tap Get fonts online to choose from a wider  
selection.  
From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the  
device and the memory card as well as mount or unmount  
the SD card.  
To view the memory allocation for your device and external  
SD card:  
From the Home screen, tap  
Settings ➔  
Storage.The available memory displays under the Total  
space and Available space headings for both Device  
memory and SD card.  
SD card  
Tap Unmount SD card to unmount your SD card so that  
• Font size: allows you to select which size of font is displayed.  
Touch key light duration: allows you to set the time that the  
touch keys located on the bottom of your phone are lit.  
• Display battery percentage: allows you to see the battery  
charge percentage next to the battery charge icon at the top of  
the display.  
you can safely remove it, then tap OK  
– or –  
.
1. Tap Format SD card to re-format your SD card. This will  
delete all data on your SD card including music, videos,  
and photos.  
2. Tap Format SD card again.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Tap Delete all to continue or press  
to cancel.  
4. Tap Learn about Power saving mode to learn about  
various ways to conserve battery power.  
Note: The Format SD card option is only available when your  
Battery  
SD card is mounted.  
See how much battery power is used for device activities.  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
Settings Battery.  
For more information about mounting or unmounting the  
memory card see “SD Card Overview” on page 49.  
The battery level displays in percentage. The amount  
of time the battery was used also displays. Battery  
usage displays in percentages per application.  
Power Saving Mode  
Power Saving Mode allows you to manage your phone to  
conserve power.  
2. Tap Screen Android OS, Cell standby, Android System,  
,
1. From the Home screen, tap  
saving mode  
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon next to Power saving mode to turn  
Power saving mode on  
Settings  
Power  
or any other listed application to view how it is  
affecting battery use.  
.
Note: Other applications may be running that affect battery  
.
ON  
use.  
3. Tap the following options to create a checkmark and  
conserve power:  
Application manager  
• CPU power saving: allows you to limit the maximum  
performance of the CPU.  
You can download and install applications from Play Store or  
create applications using the Android SDK and install them  
on your device. Use Application manager settings to manage  
applications.  
• Screen power saving: allows you to lower the screen power  
level.  
Turn off haptic feedback: allows you to turn off vibration when  
you tap or touch the screen.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
127  
       
2. Tap the DOWNLOADED tab to view a list of all the  
downloaded applications on your device.  
Warning! Because this device can be configured with system  
software not provided by or supported by Google or  
any other company, end-users operate these devices  
at their own risk.  
3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the  
Downloaded tabs, press  
name  
Sort by size or Sort by  
.
Memory Usage  
See how memory is being used by Downloaded or Running  
applications.  
4. Tap an application to view and update information  
about the application, including memory usage, default  
settings, and permissions.  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
Application manager  
2. Tap DOWNLOADED ON SD CARD  
Settings ➔  
Running Services  
View and control services running on your device.  
.
,
,
RUNNING, or ALL to  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
Application manager  
Settings ➔  
display memory usage for that category of  
applications.  
.
2. Tap the RUNNING tab. All the applications that are  
currently running on the device display.  
3. Tap Show cached processes to display all the cached  
processes that are running. Tap Show services in use to  
switch back.  
The graph at the bottom of the Downloaded tab shows  
used and free device memory. The graph at the bottom  
of the Running tab shows used and free RAM.  
Downloaded  
4. Tap one of the applications to view application  
information.  
Displays apps you have downloaded onto your device.  
1. From a Home screen, tap Settings ➔  
Application manager  
.
The following options display:  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Stop: Stops the application from running on the device. This is  
• Location and Google search: allows Google to use your  
usually done prior to uninstalling the application.  
location data for improved search results and other services.  
Lock Screen Settings  
Choose settings for unlocking your screen. For more  
information about using the lock and unlock features, see  
Warning! Not all services can be stopped. Stopping services  
may have undesirable consequences on the  
application or Android System.  
Screen Lock  
• Report: Report failure and other application information.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
screen  
Settings  
Lock  
Note: Options vary by application.  
.
2. Tap Screen lock for these options:  
Location Services  
• Swipe: Swipe the screen to unlock it.  
The Location services settings allow you to set up how the  
phone will determine your location and the sensor settings  
for your phone.  
• Motion: While tapping and holding the screen, tilt the device  
forward to unlock.  
• Pattern: A screen unlock pattern is a touch gesture you create  
and use to unlock your device. Follow the prompts to create or  
change your screen unlock pattern.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Location services  
Settings  
.
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark  
and activate the service:  
• PIN: Select a PIN to use for unlocking the screen.  
• Password: Create a password for unlocking the screen.  
• None: No pattern, PIN, or password is required. The screen will  
never lock.  
• Use wireless networks: allows applications to use data from  
mobile networks to help determine your location.  
• Use GPS satellites: allows applications to use GPS to pinpoint  
your location.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
129  
     
• Weather displays the current area weather on the Lock screen.  
Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on  
Lock screen options  
Activate or deactivates various Unlock screen functions.  
.
ON  
Tap and set both the temperature units (F or C) and a refresh  
time.  
Note: The Lock screen options are only available when the  
Screen lock option is set to Swipe or Motion  
.
• Ripple effect displays a ripple effect on the Lock screen. It will  
be disabled for live wallpapers.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
screen Lock screen options  
2. The following options are available:  
Settings  
Lock  
• Help text shows help information on the Lock screen.  
• Camera quick access provides you with quick access to the  
camera function from the Lock screen. When this option has  
been activated, touch and hold the lock screen while rotating  
the device to the landscape position then release the screen.  
.
• Shortcuts sets shortcuts to appear at the bottom of the Lock  
screen. Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on  
.
ON  
Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on  
.
ON  
• Information ticker sets the news and stock information ticker  
to appear across the bottom of the Lock screen. Touch and  
Note: These options vary depending on the selected Lock  
slide the slider to the right to turn it on  
.
ON  
settings.  
• Clock allows you to display the digital clock while the Lock  
screen is active. Enabled by default.  
Security  
• Dual clock displays a set of dual digital clock on the Lock  
screen while you are traveling. Tap the entry to set your home  
city. This time zone then becomes the time used by one of  
these on-screen clocks. Touch and slide the slider to the right  
The Security settings allow you to determine the security  
level for your phone.  
to turn it on  
.
ON  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Encryption  
Set up SIM card lock  
Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make  
unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on  
your SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code.  
To require a numeric PIN or password to decrypt your phone  
each time you power it on or encrypt the data on your SD  
card each time it is connected:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
Settings  
When enabled, your phone will ask for a PIN number each  
time you use the phone. Using this option you can also  
change your SIM PIN number.  
.
2. Tap Encrypt device. For more information, read the  
displayed help screen.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
2. Tap Set up SIM card lock  
3. Tap Lock SIM card, enter your SIM PIN code, then tap  
OK  
Settings  
.
3. Tap Encrypt external SD card to enable the encryption  
on SD card data that requires a password be entered  
each time the microSD card is connected.  
.
.
Tip: Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent.  
Encryption may take an hour or more.  
Note: You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change  
your SIM PIN code.  
Set up/change password  
Use this option to set up your password when one is first  
required or change your current password.  
4. Tap Change SIM PIN  
5. Enter your old SIM PIN code and tap OK  
6. Enter your new SIM PIN code and tap OK  
7. Re-type your new SIM PIN code and tap OK  
.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Set up/change password  
2. Enter a new password and tap Confirm  
3. Enter the new password again and tap Confirm  
Settings  
Security  
.
.
.
.
.
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
131  
   
Make passwords visible  
When enabled, password characters display briefly as you  
touch them while entering passwords.  
Note: If a device uses multiple enabled administration  
applications, the strictest policy is enforced.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
Settings  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
2. Tap Device administrators  
Settings  
.
.
2. Tap Make passwords visible to create a checkmark and  
.
enable or disable the display of password characters.  
3. Select a device administrator and follow the prompts. If  
no device administrators are listed, you can download  
them from the Play Store.  
Device Administrators  
The Device Administration feature allows you to select one or  
more administration applications that control your device for  
security purposes (for example, if your phone is lost of  
stolen). These applications enforce remote or local device  
security policies.  
Unknown sources  
This feature allows you to download and install non-Market  
applications.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
2. Tap Unknown sources  
Settings  
Some of the features a device administration application  
might control are:  
.
.
Setting the number of failed password attempts before the  
device is restored to factory settings.  
A check mark is displayed to indicate it is active.  
Automatically locking the device.  
Warning! Enabling this option causes your phone and personal  
data to be more vulnerable to attack by applications  
from unknown sources.  
Restoring factory settings on the device.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Trusted Credentials  
If a certificate authority (CA) certificate gets compromised or  
for some other reason you do not trust it, you can disable or  
remove it.  
Caution! When you disable a system CA certificate, the Disable  
button changes to Enable, so you can enable the  
certificate again, if necessary. When you remove a  
user-installed CA certificate, it is permanently  
deleted and must be re-installed, if needed.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
2. Tap Trusted credentials  
The trusted credentials screen has two tabs:  
Settings  
.
5. Tap OK to return to the certificate list.  
.
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.  
• System: Displays CA certificates that are permanently installed  
in the ROM of your device.  
Install from device storage  
Install encrypted certificates from an installed memory card.  
• User: Displays any CA certificates that you installed, for  
example, in the process of installing a client certificate.  
3. Tap a CA certificate to examine its details.  
A scrolling screen displays the details.  
Note: You must have installed a memory card containing  
encrypted certificates to use this feature.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
Settings  
4. Scroll to the bottom of the details screen and tap  
Disable to disable a System certificate or Remove to  
remove a User certificate.  
.
2. Tap Install from device storage, then choose a  
certificate and follow the prompts to install.  
Changing Your Settings  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clear credentials  
Clear stored credentials.  
Keyboards and Input Methods  
You can change the keyboard used by your device by  
following these steps:  
Note: This setting only appears if you have installed encrypted  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input  
2. Tap Default and select an input type.  
3. Tap the icon next to the input method that you  
would like to configure the settings for.  
Settings  
certificates.  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
Settings  
.
2. Tap Clear credentials to remove all certificates.  
4. Based on your selection of input method, the  
appropriate settings will appear and are explained  
below.  
Language and Input  
This menu allows you to configure the language in which to  
display the menus. You can also set onscreen keyboard  
options.  
Google voice typing settings  
From this menu you can set Samsung keyboard options.  
Language  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input  
2. Tap the icon next to Google voice typing  
3. The following options are available:  
Settings  
You can change the language used by your device by  
following these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input Language  
.
.
Settings  
.
• Choose input languages: tap on a language that you want to  
input. Select Automatic to use the local language or select a  
language from the list.  
2. Tap a language from the list.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• Block offensive words  
the blocking of recognized offensive words from the results of  
your voice-input Google typing.  
:
tap to create a checkmark and enable  
• Pen detection automatically changes to handwriting mode  
whenever the pen is detected.  
• One-handed operation modifies the keyboard layout to make  
it easier to use with only one hand.  
• Download offline speech recognition: Enables voice input  
while offline.  
• Handwriting enables the device to recognize on-screen  
handwriting and convert it to text. Touch and slide the slider to  
Samsung Keyboard settings  
From this menu you can set Samsung keyboard options.  
the right to turn it on  
.
ON  
• Voice input activates the Voice input feature. This is an  
experimental feature that uses Google’s networked speech  
recognition application.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input  
2. Tap the icon next to Samsung keyboard  
Settings  
.
.
• Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of  
the first word in each sentence (standard English style).  
• Auto-punctuate automatically inserts a full stop in a sentence  
by tapping the space bar twice when using the on-screen  
QWERTY keyboard.  
• Portrait keyboard types allows you to choose a keyboard  
configuration (Qwerty [default] or 3x4 Keyboard).  
• Input languages sets the input language. Tap a language from  
the available list. The keyboard is updated to the selected  
language.  
• Character preview provides an automatic preview of the  
current character selection within the text string. This is helpful  
when multiple characters are available within one key.  
• Key-tap vibration enables vibration feedback when you tap an  
on-screen key.  
• Predictive text enables predictive text entry mode. This must  
be enabled to gain access to the advanced settings. Touch and  
hold to access the advanced settings. Touch and slide the slider  
to the right to turn it on  
.
ON  
• Continuous input allows you to type words by swiping  
between on-screen keys.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
135  
     
• Key-tap sound enables auditory feedback when you tap an  
on-screen key.  
• Learn from Twitter: allows you to login to your Twitter account  
so your phone can learn your Twitter style.  
• Learn from Messaging: allows your device to learn from your  
Messages.  
Tutorial launches a brief on-screen tutorial covering the main  
concepts related to the Samsung keyboard.  
• Reset settings resets the keyboard settings back to their  
original configuration.  
• Learn from Contacts: allows your device to learn from your  
Contacts.  
Predictive Text Settings  
• Clear personalized data: removes all personalized data that  
you have entered.  
From this menu you can set Predictive Text settings.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Settings  
Language and input  
2. Tap the icon next to Samsung keyboard  
3. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the  
Predictive text field, to turn it ON  
4. Tap Predictive text  
5. The following options are available:  
Swype Keypad Settings  
To configure Swype settings:  
.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input  
2. Tap the icon next to Swype  
Settings  
.
.
ON  
.
.
3. Tap How to Swype to view an on-screen manual for  
Swype.  
• Personalized data: allows you to use personal language that  
you have added to make your prediction results better.  
• Learn from E-mail: allows you to login to your Email account  
so your phone can learn your Email style.  
4. Tap Gestures to view helpful information on using  
gestures while using Swype.  
5. Tap Preferences to alter these settings:  
• Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you  
enter text using the keypad.  
• Learn from Facebook: allows you to login to your Facebook  
account so your phone can learn your Facebook style.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Sound on keypresses: turns on sounds generated by the  
Swype application.  
6. Tap Language Options to activate and select the current  
text input language. Default language is US English.  
7. Tap Swype Connect to activate and configure the  
following data settings:  
• Show helpful tips: turns on a flashing indicator for quick help.  
• Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words.  
When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start  
the next word.  
• Register now: allows you to register with Swype so you can  
take advantage of backup and sync options.  
• Backup & Sync: allows you to backup your Swype dictionary  
and sync your Swype dictionary across multiple devices.  
• Contribute usage data: when enabled, allows the Nuance®  
application to collect usage data for better word predictions.  
• Cellular data: when enabled, activates cellular data usage by  
the Swype application so it can receive program updates,  
language downloads, and other related features via your  
existing data connection.  
• Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of  
a sentence.  
• Show complete trace: once enabled, sets wether or not to  
display the complete Swype path.  
• Pop-up on keypress: once enabled, displays a character  
above an on-screen key while typing.  
• Next word prediction: once enabled, predicts the next word in  
your text string based on your current text entries.  
8. Tap Personalization to activate and configure the  
following social media personalization settings.  
• Edit Dictionary: allows you to edit your personal Swype  
dictionary.  
Note: If incorrect words are being entered as you type,  
disabled this feature.  
• Reset Swype’s dictionary: once enabled, deletes any words  
you have added to Swype’s dictionary.  
• Version: displays the software version information.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
137  
     
• Facebook: allows you to log into your current Facebook  
account from where contact names are added to your Swype’s  
personal dictionary for later use when you enter names into text  
fields. Helps recognize familiar names.  
• Language: Choose a language for your voice input.  
• Speech output: Sets whether you will use speech output  
always or only when using hands-free.  
• Block offensive words: Enable or disable blocking of  
recognized offensive words from the results of your voice-input  
Google searches.  
Twitter: allows you to sing into your existing Twitter account  
from where names and words are added to your personal  
dictionary. Helps recognize familiar names and words.  
• Gmail: allows you to sign in to your existing Gmail account from  
where existing contact information is added to your personal  
dictionary. Helps recognize familiar names.  
• Hotword detection: Enable to being able to launch voice  
search by saying the word “Google”.  
• Download offline speech recognition: Enables voice input  
while offline.  
9. Tap Updates to update the application if new software  
is available.  
5. Tap Text-to-speech output and select Google Text-to-  
speech Engine  
6. Tap next to Google Text-to-speech Engine to  
configure the following settings:  
.
Speech Settings  
This menu allows you to set the speech settings for Voice  
input.  
• Language: allows you to set the language for spoken text.  
• Settings for Google Text-to-speech Engine: allows you to  
view Open Source Licenses. This option only appears when you  
have selected Google Text-to-speech as your preferred TTS  
engine.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input  
Settings  
.
2. Tap Voice recognizer to configure the voice recognizer  
that your phone will use.  
3. Tap Google or Samsung powered by Vlingo  
.
4. Tap Voice search to configure the following:  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• Install voice data: allows you to install voice data for speech  
synthesis. This option only appears when you have selected  
Google Text-to-speech as your preferred TTS engine.  
7. Scroll down to the General section to access the  
following options:  
Backup and Reset  
Back Up My Data  
By setting this option, the Google server will back up all of  
your settings and data.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and reset  
Settings  
Backup  
• Speech rate: Set the speed at which the text is spoken.  
• Listen to an example: Play a sample of speech synthesis  
(available if voice data is installed).  
.
2. Tap Back up my data to enable or disable back up of  
application data, WI-Fi passwords, and other settings  
to the Google server.  
8. Tap the ON/OFF icon  
next to Driving mode to  
ON  
turn it on and enable incoming calls and notifications to  
be read out automatically.  
Backup Account  
If you have enabled the Back up my data option, then the  
Backup account option is available.  
Pointer speed  
This option sets your Pointer speed.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and reset  
Settings  
Backup  
Settings  
.
Language and input  
.
2. Tap Backup account and tap your Google Gmail account  
or tap Add account to set your Google Gmail account to  
be backed up to the Google server.  
2. Tap Pointer speed then drag the slide to the right to go  
faster or to the left to go slower.  
3. Tap OK to save your setting.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
139  
     
Automatic Restore  
By setting this option, when you reinstall an application, all of  
your backed up settings and data will be restored.  
Warning! Performing a Factory data reset will erase all data  
from your phone and internal SD card, including your  
Google account, system and application data and  
settings, and downloaded applications. It will not  
erase current system software, bundled  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and reset  
Settings  
Backup  
.
applications, and external SD card files such as  
music and photos.  
2. Tap Automatic restore to enable or disable automatic  
restoration of settings from the Google server.  
Factory Data Reset  
From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings  
Add Account  
This menu allows you to set up, manage, and synchronize  
accounts, including your Google and email accounts.  
to the factory default settings.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and reset  
2. Tap Factory data reset  
Settings  
Backup  
Adding an Account  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
.
Settings Add  
.
account  
.
The Factory data reset screen displays reset  
information.  
2. Tap one of the account types.  
3. Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your  
credentials and set up the account.  
3. Tap Reset device, then follow the prompts to perform  
the reset.  
A green circle will appear next to the account type once  
you have created an account. Your email account will  
also be displayed in the Accounts section of the main  
Settings menu.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Removing an Account  
Caution! Excessive shaking or impact to the device may cause  
unintended results. To learn how to properly control  
Important! Removing an account also deletes all of its  
messages, contacts, and other data from the  
device.  
motions, tap  
Settings  
Motion  
Learn  
about motions  
.
3. The following options are available. Tap an option to  
activate the feature. A checkmark is displayed.  
• Direct call: Once enabled, the device will dial the currently  
displayed on-screen Contact entry as soon as you place the  
device to your ear.  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
Settings.  
2. Tap the account which is located in the Accounts  
section.  
3. Tap the account name.  
4. Tap Remove account, then tap Remove account at the  
prompt to remove the account and delete all its  
messages, contacts, and other data.  
• Double tap to top: Once enabled, double tap the top of the  
device to be taken to the top of the current on-screen list.  
• Tilt to zoom: Once enabled, you must be on a screen where  
content can be zoomed. In a single motion, touch and hold two  
points on the display then tilt the tilt the device back and forth to  
zoom in or out.  
Motion  
The Motion settings allow you to set up various Motion  
activation services. For more information on using gestures,  
• Pan to move icon: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired  
application shortcut icon or widget on the screen. Once it  
detaches, move the device left or right to migrate it to a new  
location.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon  
Settings  
Motion.  
at the top of your  
ON  
screen to activate Motion.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
141  
     
• Pan to browse images  
:
Once enabled, touch and hold a  
• Palm touch to mute/pause: Once enabled, you can pause any  
on-screen video or mute any current sound by simply covering  
the screen with your hand. Once you remove your hand from  
the screen, the device goes back to normal by either continuing  
to play the current video or unmuting the current sound.  
• Learn about hand motions: provides additional help on using  
the different hand motions.  
desired on-screen image to pan around it. Move the device left  
or right to pan vertically or up and down to pan horizontally  
around the large on-screen image.  
• Shake to update: Once enabled, shake your device to rescan  
for Bluetooth devices, rescan for Wi-Fi devices, Refresh a Web  
page, etc.  
Turn over to mute/pause: Once enabled, mute incoming calls  
and any playing sounds by turning the device display down on  
a surface. This is the opposite of the Pickup to be Notified  
Gesture.  
S Pen Settings  
This menu allows you to modify settings related to use of the  
S Pen.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
S Pen.  
• Sensitivity settings: allows you to access additional settings  
for Gyroscope calibration, Tilt to zoom, Pan to move icon, and  
Pan to browse images.  
2. Tap Dominant hand, the select Left handed or Right  
handed (default).  
3. Tap Hovering pen icon to display the hovering pen icon  
whenever your pen tip is near the screen.  
4. Tap Gesture to read about the various pen gestures you  
can use.  
• Learn about motions: provides additional help on using the  
different motions.  
• Palm swipe to capture: Once enabled, you can capture any  
screen by swiping across the screen with your palm. In a single  
motion, press the side of your hand on the screen and swipe  
form left to right. The image is then copied to the clipboard.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Accessory Settings  
This menu allows you to select the Audio output mode when  
using a car or desk dock.  
Date and Time  
This menu allows you to change the current time and date  
displayed.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Accessory  
Settings  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and time  
Settings  
Date  
.
.
2. Tap Dock sound to play sounds when inserting or  
removing the phone from the dock.  
2. Tap Automatic date and time to allow the network set  
the date and time.  
3. Tap Audio output mode to use the external dock  
speakers when the phone is docked.  
3. Tap Automatic time zone to allow the network set the  
time zone.  
4. Tap Desk home screen display to display the desk home  
screen whenever the phone is docked.  
5. Tap Audio output to set your Audio output to Stereo or  
Surround.  
Important! Deactivate Automatic date and time to manually set  
the date and the time.  
4. Tap Set date and tap the up and down arrows to set the  
6. Tap Audio applications to enable audio applications to  
appear in the quick panel whenever earphones are  
connected.  
Month  
5. Tap Set time and tap the up and down arrows to set the  
Hour Minute, and PM AM, then tap Set  
,
Day, and Year then tap Set.  
,
/
.
6. Tap Select time zone, then tap a time zone.  
7. Optional: Tap Use 24-hour format. If this is not selected  
the phone automatically uses a 12-hour format.  
8. Tap Select date format and tap the date format type.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
143  
     
6. Tap the Accessibility shortcut option to allow the  
accessibility shortcut under the device options to be  
used by pressing and holding the power key.  
7. Tap the TalkBack option to activate the TalkBack  
feature.  
Accessibility  
Accessibility services are special features to make using the  
device easier for those with certain physical disabilities. Use  
the Accessibility settings to activate these services.  
Note: You can download accessibility applications from the  
Play Store and manage their use here.  
Note: TalkBack, when installed and enabled, speaks feedback  
to help blind and low-vision users.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Accessibility  
Settings  
.
Important! TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter,  
except passwords, including personal data and  
credit card numbers. It may also log your user  
interface interactions with the device.  
2. Tap the Auto-rotate screen to automatically rotate the  
screen from landscape to portrait when you rotate your  
phone.  
3. Tap the Screen timeout option to timeout the  
accessibility feature after a defined amount of time.  
4. Tap the Speak passwords option to activate this feature  
which reads out password information.  
8. Tap the Font size field to change the size of the fonts  
used on the device within menus, options, etc. Choose  
from: Tiny, Small, Normal, Large, or Huge.  
9. Tap the Text-to-speech output field to adjust your text-  
to-speech settings. For more information, refer to  
“Speech Settings” on page 138.  
5. Tap the Answering/ending calls option to be able to  
accept incoming calls by pressing the home key or end  
calls using the power key.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
10. Tap Enhance web accessibility if want to allow apps to  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the  
install scripts from Google that make their Web content  
Developer options field, to turn ON  
.
ON  
more accessible. Tap Allow  
.
3. The following options are available:  
11. Tap the Mono audio field to enable stereo audio to be  
compressed into a single mono audio stream for use  
with a single earbud/earphone.  
• Desktop backup password: allows you to protect your  
desktop with a backup password ID.  
• Stay awake: with the Stay awake option enabled, your screen  
will never sleep while you are charging the phone.  
• Protect SD card: requires apps to ask your permission before  
accessing data on your SD card.  
12. Tap the Turn off all sounds field to mute every sound  
made by the device during taps, selections,  
notifications, etc.  
13. Tap the Tap and hold delay field to select a time interval  
for this action. Choose from: Short, Medium, or Long.  
• USB debugging: allows debugging when the device is  
attached to a PC by a USB cable.  
• Allow mock locations: used by developers when developing  
location-based applications.  
Developer Options  
Use the Developer options to set options for application  
development.  
• Select app to be debugged: allows developers to select a  
specific app to debug.  
Warning! The developer options are intended for development  
use only. They can cause errors to occur on your  
device and with the applications you have on it.  
• Wait for debugger: specified apps must have debugger  
attached before executing.  
• Show touches: Displays touch interactions on the screen.  
• Show pointer location: Highlights the data that was touched  
on the screen.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Developer options  
Settings  
.
• Show layout boundaries: displays clip bounds, margins, etc.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
145  
     
• Show GPU view updates: flashes views inside windows when  
drawn with GPU.  
• Do not keep activities: destroys every activity as soon as the  
application is closed.  
• Show screen updates: Areas of the screen flash when they  
update.  
• Limit background processes: sets the number of processes  
that can run in the background.  
• Window animation scale: Configure the scale for animation  
(ranges from off to 10x).  
• Show all ANRs: displays a prompt when applications running  
in the background are not responding.  
Transition animation scale: Configure the scale for  
transitioning when using animation (ranges from off to 10x).  
• Animator duration scale: Configure the scale for duration  
when using animation (ranges from off to 10x).  
• Disable hardware overlays: Assigns the work of rendering to  
the GPU.  
About Device  
This menu contains legal information, system tutorial  
information, and other phone information such as the model  
number, firmware version, baseband version, kernal version,  
and software build number.  
To access phone information:  
• Force GPU rendering: allows the use of 2D hardware  
accelerations in applications.  
From the Home screen, tap  
device  
The following information displays:  
Settings  
About  
.
• Strict mode: Makes the screen flash when applications  
perform long operations on the main thread.  
• Show CPU usage: Screen highlights the current CPU usage.  
• GPU rendering profile: Uses a 2D acceleration in applications.  
• Enable traces: Enables/disables on-screen tracing based on  
an available parameter.  
• Software update: allows you to update your phone software, if  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• Status: displays the battery status, the level of the battery  
(percentage), network, signal strength, mobile network type,  
service state, roaming status, mobile network state, the phone  
number for this device, IMEI number, IMEI SV, IP address, Wi-Fi  
MAC address, Bluetooth address, Serial number, and Up time.  
• Legal information: This option displays information about  
Open source licenses as well as Google legal information. This  
information clearly provides copyright and distribution legal  
information and facts as well as Google Terms of Service,  
Terms of Service for Android-powered Phones, and much more  
pertinent information as a reference. Read the information and  
Note: Baseband, kernal and build numbers are usually used  
for updates to the handset or support. For additional  
information please contact your AT&T service  
representative.  
Software Update  
The AT&T Software Update feature enables you to use your  
phone to connect to the network and upload any new phone  
software directly to your phone. The phone automatically  
updates with the latest available software when you access  
this option.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
device Software update  
2. Tap Check for updates  
Settings  
About  
terms, then press  
to return to the Settings menu.  
.
• Model number: displays the phone’s model number.  
• Android version: displays the android version loaded on this  
handset.  
.
3. At the AT&T Software update prompt, tap OK to  
continue.  
• Baseband version: displays the baseband version loaded on  
this handset.  
4. The phone automatically updates the software (if  
available), otherwise, if there is no new software  
• Kernel version: displays the kernel version loaded on this  
handset.  
available, tap OK  
.
• Build number: displays the software, build number.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
147  
   
5. When updating software, once the update file is  
downloaded, you can delay the update on the start  
screen by postponing it for a certain period of time. If  
you want to resume the update before the selected  
time, tap Continue update  
.
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 9: Connections  
This section describes the various connections your phone  
can make including accessing the Internet with your  
Browser, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and Connecting your PC.  
Zooming in and out of the Browser  
There are several ways to Zoom in and out on your browser  
when you are in desktop view. Desktop view makes your  
screen appear more like your PC browser.  
Web  
1. From your browser, press  
Desktop view.  
The Browser is your access to the mobile web. This section  
explains how to navigate the Browser and introduces you to  
the basic features.  
A checkmark will appear to show that the feature is  
activated.  
Accessing the Mobile Web  
To access the Browser:  
2. After tapping on a link or article, use one of these  
methods:  
From the Home screen, tap Browser  
.
• Tilting: Tap and hold the screen at two points then tilt the  
device back and forth to reduce or enlarge the screen. You  
must first enable motion in the Settings section. For more  
• Double tap: Quickly tap the screen twice on the web page to  
zoom in or out.  
The AT&T/YAHOO! mobile homepage displays.  
Navigating with the Browser  
1. Tap an entry to select an item.  
2. Sweep the screen with your finger in an up or down  
motion to scroll through a website.  
• Pinching: Sweep in opposite directions at the same time to  
zoom in or out (use a pinching-in or pinching-out motion).  
3. Sweep the screen left to right to move laterally across  
a web page.  
4. Press  
to return to the previous page.  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
149  
         
• Settings: allows you to modify your web settings. For more  
Browser Options  
1. From the home page, press  
options:  
to access the following  
Enter a URL  
You can access a website quickly by entering the URL.  
• Home: takes you to your Home page.  
• New window: displays a new window so you can browse  
multiple URLs.  
Websites are optimized for viewing on your phone.  
To enter a URL and go to a particular website, follow these  
steps:  
1. Tap the URL field at the top of your screen.  
• Add bookmark: allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list.  
• Add shortcut: allows you to add a shortcut to your  
Home screen.  
2. Enter the URL using the on-screen keypad.  
• Share page: allows you to share the page using Gmail or as  
a message.  
The website displays.  
Search the Internet  
To perform an internet search using keywords, follow these  
• Find on page: allows you to search in the current page.  
• Desktop view: Your browser displays a website in a modified  
format that makes it easier to read. Desktop view displays a  
website the same way it would display on your PC.  
• Save for offline reading: saves the web page so you can read  
it later even when offline.  
steps:  
1. From the Google homepage, tap the Web Search field.  
2. Enter the keyword(s) to search using the on-screen  
keypad and tap Go  
.
3. Tap a link to view the website.  
• Brightness: allows you to adjust the brightness of your display.  
• Downloads: displays the download history.  
• Print: allows you to print the screen or web page on a  
Samsung printer using Wi-Fi.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Adding and Deleting Windows  
You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time.  
To add a new window, follow these steps:  
Note: The incognito icon appears in the upper-left of the new  
browser window while you are in this mode.  
1. From your browser, press  
New window.  
To exit from the incognito window:  
2
A new browser window is opened.  
1. From your browser window, tap  
(New  
window).  
2
2. Tap  
to see thumbnails of all open windows.  
2. Scroll across the available windows and locate the  
3. Tap a window listing to open up that Internet window.  
4. Tap at the top right corner of the web page  
thumbnail to delete the window.  
incognito window.  
3. Tap  
window.  
next to the incognito listing to delete this  
Going Incognito  
Using Bookmarks  
The incognito feature allows you to view Internet sites  
outside of the normal browsing. Pages viewed in this  
incognito window won’t appear within your browser history  
or search history, and no traces (such as cookies) are left on  
your device.  
While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to  
quickly and easily access it at a future time. The URLs  
(website addresses) of the bookmarked sites display in the  
Bookmarks page. From the Bookmarks page you can also  
view your Most visited websites and view your History.  
Note: Any downloaded files will be preserved and will stay on your  
1. From the Home webpage, tap  
.
device after you exit the incognito mode.  
The Bookmarks page displays.  
2. Press  
to display the following options:  
To add a new incognito window:  
1. From your browser window, tap  
2
.
2. A new browser window displays.  
Connections  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• List/Thumbnail view: You can select Thumbnail view  
(default) to see a thumbnail of the webpage with the name  
listed, or you can select List view to see a list of the bookmarks  
with Name and URL listed.  
• Copy link URL: Allows you to copy the URL address to use in a  
message.  
• Delete bookmark: Allows you to delete a bookmark. For more  
information, refer to “Deleting Bookmarks” on page 153.  
• Set as homepage: Sets the bookmark to your new homepage.  
• Create folder: Creates a new bookmark folder.  
• Change order: Allows you to move pages around on the  
Bookmarks page. Touch and hold a bookmark icon, then move  
it to the desired location.  
Adding Bookmarks  
1. From any webpage, tap  
Add bookmark.  
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the name of the  
bookmark, the URL, and the Folder.  
• Move to folder: Allows you to move a page to a folder.  
• Delete: Deletes the selected bookmark.  
The URL field automatically fills.  
3. Tap a bookmark to view the webpage, or touch and  
hold a bookmark for the following options:  
• Open: Opens the webpage of the selected bookmark.  
• Open in new window: Opens the webpage in a new window.  
• Edit bookmark: Allows you to edit the name or URL of the  
bookmark. For more information, refer to “Editing  
Bookmarks” on page 152.  
3. Tap Save  
.
The URL saves to the appointed folder.  
Editing Bookmarks  
1. From the Bookmarks page, tap and hold the bookmark  
you want to edit.  
2. Tap Edit bookmark  
.
3. Use the on-screen keypad to edit the name of the  
• Add shortcut: Adds a shortcut to the bookmarked webpage to  
your phone’s Home screen.  
bookmark or the URL.  
4. Tap Save  
.
• Share link: Allows you to share a URL address via Bluetooth,  
Gmail, or Messaging.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Deleting Bookmarks  
1. From the Bookmarks page, tap and hold the bookmark  
you want to delete.  
Saved Pages  
The Saved pages list provides you with a list of the websites  
that you saved for offline reading.  
1. From the Home webpage, tap  
Saved pages.  
2. Tap Delete bookmark  
.
A list of your saved webpages displays with the Name  
beneath the website icon. The webpages that were  
visited the most display at the top.  
3. At the Delete confirmation window, tap OK  
.
Using your History  
The History list provides you with a list of the most recently  
visited websites. These entries can be used to return to  
previously unmarked web pages.  
2. Tap any entry to display the webpage.  
Browser Settings  
To make adjustments in your browser settings, follow these  
1. From the Home webpage, tap From any webpage, tap  
History.  
steps:  
A list of your most recently visited websites displays  
with Name and URL address.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Browser  
Settings  
.
2. Tap on a category such as Today  
visited  
3. Tap any entry to display the webpage.  
4. Press Clear history to delete the History list.  
,
Yesterday, or Most  
2. The following options are available:  
.
General  
• Set home page: Sets the current home page for the Web  
browser.  
5. Tap OK at the Clear prompt.  
• Form auto-fill: allows you to fill in web forms with a single tap.  
• Auto-fill text: allows you to enter text to be used in the Form  
auto-fill feature.  
– or –  
6. Press  
Settings  
Privacy and security.  
7. Tap Clear history, then tap OK at the “Clear” prompt.  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
153  
   
Privacy and security  
• Clear passwords: Deletes any previously stored usernames or  
passwords. Tap OK to complete the process.  
• Enable notifications: Allows website notifications. Select  
Always on, On demand, or Off.  
• Clear cache: Deletes all currently cached data. Tap OK to  
complete the process.  
• Clear history: Clears the browser navigation history. Tap OK to  
complete the process.  
• Clear notifications: Deletes website notification access  
information.  
• Show security warnings: Notifies you if there is a security  
issue with the current website.  
Accessibility  
• Accept cookies: Allows sites, that require cookies, to save and  
read cookies from your device.  
• Force zoom: allows you to override the website’s request to  
control zoom.  
• Clear all cookie data: Deletes all current browser cookie files.  
• Remember form data: Allows the device to store data from  
any previously filled out forms. Remove the checkmark to  
disable this function.  
Text size: allows you to preview the text size, scale the text size  
using a slider bar, set the zoom amount on double tap using a  
slider bar, and minimize the font size using a slider bar.  
• Inverted rendering: allows you to preview a website page,  
select Inverted rendering (black becomes white and vice versa),  
and adjust the Contrast using a slider bar.  
• Clear form data: Deletes any stored data from previously filled  
out forms. Tap OK to complete the process.  
Advanced  
• Enable location: Allows websites to request access to your  
location.  
• Select search engine: allows you to set your default search  
engine to Google, Yahoo!, or Bing.  
• Clear location access: Clears location access for all websites.  
Tap OK to complete the process.  
• Open in background: New pages are launched in a separate  
page and displayed behind the current one. Remove the  
checkmark to disable this function.  
• Remember passwords: Stores usernames and passwords for  
visited sites. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Enable JavaScript: Enables Javascript for the current Web  
page. Without this feature, some pages may not display  
properly. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.  
• Allow multiple tabs per app: Allows you to use multiple  
navigation tabs per application.  
• Block pop-ups: Prevents popup advertisement or windows  
from appearing onscreen. Remove the checkmark to disable  
this function.  
Text encoding: Adjusts the current text encoding.  
• Reset to default: Clears all browser data and resets all settings  
to default.  
• Enable plug-ins: Allows the download of plug-ins such as  
Adobe Flash.  
Bandwidth management  
• Default storage: Allows you to set your default storage to  
Phone or Memory Card.  
• Preload search results: Allows the browser to preload high  
confidence search results in the background to help speed up  
searches.  
• Website settings: View advanced settings for individual  
websites.  
• Page preloading: Allows the browser to preload pages in the  
background.  
• Show browser bar: Displays the browser bar at the bottom of  
the screen.  
• Load images: Allows web page images to be loaded along  
with the other text components of a loaded website.  
Labs  
• Default zoom: Adjusts the zoom feature. Set to Far, Medium,  
or Close.  
• Open pages in overview: Shows an overview of newly opened  
web pages.  
• Quick controls: allows you to open quick controls and hide the  
app and URL bars by swiping your thumb from the left or right  
edge of the screen.  
• Auto-fit pages: Allows web pages to be resized to fit as much  
of the screen as possible.  
• Full screen: allows you to access Full screen mode and hide  
the status bar.  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
155  
Connect to a Wi-Fi Network  
Wi-Fi  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Wi-Fi.  
About Wi-Fi  
The network names and security settings (Open  
network or Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi  
networks are displayed in the Wi-Fi networks section.  
Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity"and sometimes referred to  
as wifi) is a term used for certain types of Wireless Local  
Area Networks (WLAN). These device types use an 802.11  
wireless specification to transmit and receive wireless data.  
Wi-Fi communication requires access to an existing and  
accessible Wireless Access Point (WAP). These WAPs can  
either be Open (unsecured) as within most Hot Spots, or  
Secured (requiring knowledge of the Router name and  
password).  
2. Tap the network you want to connect to.  
Note: When you select an open network, you will be  
automatically connected to the network.  
3. Enter a wireless password if necessary.  
Turning Wi-Fi On  
By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off. Turning  
Wi-Fi on makes your device able to discover and connect to  
compatible in-range WAPs.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi  
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON  
Manually add your new network connection  
1. Tap Add Wi-Fi network  
.
2. Enter the Network SSID. This is the name of your  
Wireless Access Point.  
Settings.  
3. Tap the Security field and select a security option. This  
must match the current security setting on your target  
WAP.  
.
ON  
4. If secured, you will also need to enter your WAP’s  
password.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5. Tap Save to store the new information and connect to  
Wi-Fi Status Indicators  
The following icons show your Wi-Fi connection status at a  
your target WAP.  
glance:  
Note: The next time your device connects to a previously  
accessed or secured wireless network, you are not  
prompted to enter the WAP key again, unless you reset  
your device back to its factory default settings.  
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and  
communicating with a Wireless Access Point  
(WAP).  
Displays when there is a Wi-Fi access point  
available but you are not connected to it. May also  
display if there is a communication issue with the  
target Wireless Access Point (WAP).  
Turning Wi-Fi Off  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings.  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi  
field, to turn Wi-Fi OFF  
Displays when connected to another device using  
.
Note: Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and  
Bluetooth can cause an added drain to your battery and  
reduce your use times.  
Wi-Fi Advanced Settings  
The Wi-Fi settings - Advanced menu allows you to set  
up many of your device’s Wi-Fi service, including:  
Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network  
Setting your Wi-Fi sleep policy  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Wi-Fi.  
Viewing your device’s MAC Address  
Configuring use of either a DHCP or Static IP  
2. Tap Scan  
.
All available Wi-Fi networks are displayed.  
To access the Advanced Settings menu:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Wi-Fi.  
Connections  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Press  
Advanced  
.
8. Once connected, the other device will show as  
Connected in your list of Wi-Fi Direct devices and the  
icon will display at the top of your screen.  
Wi-Fi Direct  
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can  
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.  
9. To change your Device name and Password, press  
Rename device  
10. For additional information about Wi-Fi Direct, press  
Help  
.
Note: See your service plan for applicable charges for Wi-Fi  
Direct.  
.
Sharing Information with Connected Device  
To share Videos, Photos, or other information with the  
connected device, follow these steps:  
1. View the information that you want to share. For  
example, if you want to share a photo, find the photo in  
your camera viewer or My Files folder, then tap the  
Share, Share via, or Send via option.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi  
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON  
Settings  
Wi-Fi.  
.
ON  
3. Tap the Wi-Fi Direct button at the bottom of the screen.  
4. Repeat steps 1 - 3 on the other device you want to  
connect with. The steps on a different model of phone,  
may be different.  
5. On your phone, tap Scan  
.
The device scans for other Wi-Fi Direct devices.  
2. Tap the Wi-Fi Direct option.  
6. Once the device you want to connect to is displayed,  
tap on it.  
3. Tap the connected device name. For example,  
Android_49ba.  
7. The other device has 2 minutes to tap OK for the  
connection to be made.  
4. The other device will receive a prompt to receive the  
information and must tap OK  
.
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. The file is transferred and the other device will receive  
a screen notification that a Wi-Fi file has been  
received. The file can be found in My files in the  
ShareViaWifi folder.  
3. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the  
updated application from the Play Store.  
5. Read the License Agreement and tap Accept to  
continue.  
Note: Depending on the other device model, the prompts and  
shared folder information may differ.  
6. At the Welcome screen, tap OK  
.
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi  
7. At the Initial Setting screen, tap Yes if you want AT&T  
With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery  
performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T  
Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi  
connections, and track your data use.  
Smart Wi-Fi to automatically connect to any hotspot  
that is available for public use. Otherwise, tap No  
.
8. Follow the onscreen instructions to use AT&T Wi-Fi.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Wi-Fi  
AT&T Smart  
.
to www.att.com/smartwifi  
.
Bluetooth  
Note: The first time you use the AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you will  
need to download the application from the Market. For  
About Bluetooth  
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that  
allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth  
devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and  
2. At the Install screen, tap Ok  
.
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
159  
       
Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and  
wireless devices. The Bluetooth communication range is  
usually up to approximately 30 feet.  
Bluetooth Settings  
The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of  
the characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service,  
including:  
Turning Bluetooth On and Off  
To turn Bluetooth on:  
Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth  
communication and description  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the  
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON  
Settings.  
Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other  
Bluetooth devices  
.
ON  
Displaying your device’s Bluetooth address  
When active,  
appears within the Status area.  
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:  
To turn Bluetooth off:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings.  
2. Verify your Bluetooth is ON  
.
ON  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the  
3. Tap Bluetooth  
To change your Bluetooth name:  
1. From the Bluetooth settings page, press  
Rename device  
.
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth OFF  
.
Bluetooth Status Indicators  
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status  
at a glance:  
.
2. Enter a new name.  
Displays when Bluetooth is active.  
3. Tap OK to complete the rename process.  
Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and  
communicating.  
To make your device visible:  
1. From the Bluetooth settings page, press  
Visibility timeout  
.
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making your device visible allows it to be detected by other  
devices for pairing and communication.  
Pairing Bluetooth Devices  
The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted  
connections between your device and another Bluetooth  
device. When you pair devices, they share a passkey,  
allowing for fast, secure connections while bypassing the  
discovery and authentication process.  
2. Select a time that you would like your device visibility  
to time-out.  
Note: Your device is visible for up to 120 seconds (2 minutes).  
This value appears as a countdown within this field.  
To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
To show received files:  
2. Tap Scan. Your device will display a list of discovered  
in-range Bluetooth devices.  
From the Bluetooth settings page, press  
Received files  
A list of all files received from Bluetooth is displayed.  
.
3. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.  
4. Enter the passkey or PIN code, if needed, and tap OK  
5. The external device will then have to also accept the  
connection and enter your device’s PIN code.  
Once successfully paired to an external device,  
appears within the Status area.  
.
To scan for Bluetooth devices:  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Scan to search  
for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices such  
as headsets, devices, printers, and computers.  
Note: Due to different specifications and features of other  
Bluetooth-compatible devices, display and operations  
may be different, and functions such as transfer or  
exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth  
compatible devices.  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
161  
 
Deleting a paired device (unpair)  
Note: Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time  
process. Once a pairing has been created, the devices  
will continue to recognize their partnership and  
exchange information without having to re-enter a  
passcode again.  
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection  
between the device and your phone, but retains the  
knowledge of the pairing. At a later point when you wish to  
reconnect the device, there is no need to setup the  
connection information again.  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
Disconnecting a paired device  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the  
icon  
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection  
between the device and your phone, but retains the  
knowledge of the pairing. At a later point when you wish to  
reconnect the device, there is no need to setup the  
connection information again.  
next to the paired device that you want to unpair.  
3. Tap Unpair to unpair the device from your phone.  
Sending Contacts via Bluetooth  
Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities,  
you may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or  
other items using a Bluetooth connection.  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the previously  
paired device.  
Note: Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be  
3. Tap OK to confirm disconnection.  
enabled, and the recipient’s device must be visible.  
Note: Disconnections are manually done but often occur  
automatically if the paired device goes out of range of  
your phone or it is powered off.  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
2. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
3. Press Import/Export Send namecard via.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Tap each contact that you would like to send via  
Bluetooth. A green checkmark will appear next to each  
entry you select.  
Connecting as a Mass Storage Device  
You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and  
access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the  
device, you can also access the files directory from the  
memory card by using the device as a memory card reader.  
5. Tap Done  
.
6. Tap Bluetooth  
.
7. Select the paired device to send the contacts to.  
Note: The file directory of the memory card displays as a  
removable disk, separate from the internal memory.  
Note: The external Bluetooth device must be visible and  
communicating for the pairing to be successful.  
1. Insert a memory card into the device to transfer files  
from or to the memory card to your PC.  
8. A Bluetooth share notification will appear in your  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
settings USB utilities  
3. On your phone, tap Connect storage to PC  
Settings  
More  
notifications list.  
.
PC Connections  
.
You can connect your device to a PC using an optional PC  
data cable using various USB connection modes. When you  
connect the device to a PC, you can synchronize files with  
Windows Media Player, transfer data to and from your device  
directly, or use the Kies air application to access your PC  
wirelessly.  
4. Connect the multifunction jack on your device to a PC  
using a PC data cable.  
5. A pop-up window displays on the PC when connected.  
6. On your phone, tap Turn on USB storage  
7. Tap OK  
Your phone will appear on your PC as a removable disk.  
8. On the PC pop-up, click Open folder to view files  
9. Copy files between your PC and your memory card.  
Connections 163  
.
.
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
NFC  
NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when  
you touch your device with another compatible device. This  
is used for applications such as S Beam. For information on  
NFC and NFC related features, see “NFC” on page 121.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Section 10: Applications  
This section contains a description of each application that is  
available in the Applications Menu, its function, and how to  
navigate through that particular application. If the application  
is already described in another section of this user manual,  
then a cross reference to that particular section is provided.  
AllShare Play allows users to share their in-device media  
content with other external devices using DLNA certified™  
(Digital Living Network Alliance) Devices. These external  
devices must also be DLNA-compliant. Wi-Fi capability can  
be provided to TVs via a digital multimedia streamer.  
AllShare Definitions:  
AllShare  
Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-  
used applications to one of the Home screens. For details,  
can also add an application icon as a Primary Shortcut  
that displays on all Home screens. If you add an  
application as a primary shortcut, the application icon will  
not be displayed in the Applications menu. For more  
This uses the traditional DLNA  
technology for sharing multimedia  
(photos, videos, or music) to your  
Samsung Smart TV and other DLNA  
devices.  
AllShare Play  
This new feature builds on the previous  
AllShare feature. It includes features  
such as Web storage integration and  
social networking integration. This is a  
Web service that requires using a  
Samsung account.  
AllShare Play  
This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung  
device with your TV, streams content, and even keeps tabs  
on who calls or sends text messages with real-time,  
on-screen monitoring. Samsung’s AllShare makes staying  
connected easy.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
165  
         
1. From the Home screen, tap  
AllShare Play  
.
AllShare Play/Group A subset feature of AllShare Play, this  
The AllShare Play screen is displayed.  
Cast  
allows you to mirror photos and  
multimedia presentations with other  
members of your current Wi-Fi group.  
Users must be on the same Wi-Fi and  
provide an access code to join the  
group.  
2. Sign on to your Samsung account if you have not  
3. If prompted, read the on-screen message about  
network charges and tap OK to continue and return to  
the main AllShare Play screen.  
AllShare Cast (with This feature functions with an external  
Hub accessory)  
Wi-Fi AllShareCast Hub connected to a  
TV. It allows you to fully mirror what is  
currentlydisplayedonyourdevicetothe  
external TV.  
4. Tap Start and follow the on-screen prompts to view the  
on-screen tutorial.  
The AllShare Play screen is displayed.  
The application contains two separate streaming media  
options:  
Important! You must first connect both of your communicating  
devices to the same Wi-Fi network. For more  
You must also be signed on to your Samsung  
account prior to using this application. For more  
• Registered storage: allows you to receive and playback media  
stored externally (server, laptop, etc.) directly on your device by  
allowing you to add a Web storage service for streaming  
content.  
• Registered devices: allows you to stream/share selected  
multimedia content from your device to DLNA compliant device  
connected to the same Wireless Access Point.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Video quality settings: allows you to setup the video quality for  
streamed video content.  
Configuring AllShare Settings  
The AllShare Play™ application must first be configured  
prior to its initial use. You must setup parameters such as  
connected Wi-Fi, Items to share, source server address, and  
external device acceptance rights.  
• Lock AllShare Play: allows you to restrict access to AllShare  
Play by requiring a user enter the currently active and  
associated Samsung account password. Tap Locking  
AllShare Play to activate/deactivate the feature.  
• Language: allows you select a display language.  
• About this service: displays application information.  
• Customer support: allows you to contact the AllShare team via  
a new email from an available email account.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
AllShare Play  
.
2. Tap Start  
.
3. Press  
and then tap Settings and configure the  
following settings as desired:  
• Registered storage: allows you to add a Web storage location.  
Without a storage service/location added, you will not be able  
to use AllShare Play.  
Sharing Media via AllShare Play to a Target  
Device  
• Registered devices: defaults to your phone. This indicates the  
source of the streaming images and videos. Use the main  
screen to add more external devices.  
Important! Make sure all communicating devices are  
connected to the same Wi-Fi.  
• Setting up web services: allows you to set up external Web  
services by signing in to external sites such as Facebook,  
Twitter, YouTube, etc.  
1. Launch AllShare on the target device (such as an  
Internet TV, Samsung Tablet, etc.).  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
AllShare Play  
.
• Auto Upload: allows you to setup automatic upload of images  
from your device to those storage locations specified within the  
Web storage list.  
3. Tap your device name from the Devices list.  
4. Tap an available category tab (Pictures, Music, Movies,  
Files, or Info) and select a file.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
167  
   
Touch and hold to select multiple files.  
Amazon Kindle  
A file with  
in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely  
This application allows you to download books, magazines,  
and newspapers to read on your phone.  
on a web storage location. Selecting this media causes your  
device to access the file currently stored on your services’  
servers.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Amazon Kindle  
.
2. At the Kindle display, tap Get Kindle for Android  
.
5. Tap an available on-screen file, image, or video to  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the  
application from the Play Store.  
place a green check mark alongside it.  
2
6. Tap  
(Stream to connected devices) to begin  
streaming the selected files.  
7. On a target device (ex: Internet TV) select the on-  
screen Allow button to continue.  
AT&T Code Scanner  
AT&T Code Scanner allows you to scan two-dimensional (QR  
and datamatrix codes) and one-dimensional (UPC and EAN)  
barcodes found in magazines, stores, and online.  
Note: At this stage your device is requesting access to share  
media with the external source.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
AT&T Code Scanner  
.
8. Confirm  
(AllShare Controller enabled) appears in  
the Notification area at the top of the device to indicate  
you are using your device as the media source.  
Note: The first time you use the AT&T Code Scanner, you will  
need to download the updated application from the Play  
Store. When the Play Store page displays, tap Update  
.
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already  
11. After the scan, tap Yes to open the web page to view  
the information on the barcode that was scanned.  
AT&T DriveMode  
3. Read the Terms and Conditions and tap Accept to  
continue.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
AT&T  
DriveMode  
.
4. At the My Profile screen, tap OK to allow your location  
information to be used or tap Don’t Allow to bypass.  
5. Enter your information in the My Profile section.  
6. Tap ON to activate your profile. This allows the  
application to customize your results. For example,  
your zip code may help to deliver a coupon for a  
restaurant in your neighborhood. You can toggle the  
activation button between ON and OFF.  
2. View the Terms & Conditions and Privacy Policy, then  
tap I Accept to accept the terms and policy conditions.  
3. Read the Drive without distraction! notice, then tap  
Continue  
.
A default AutoReply message displays.  
4. Backspace to remove the message, then create a new  
AutoReply message.  
5. Tap Next to accept the default or changed message.  
6. Tap the checkbox to the right of each AutoReply to  
7. Tap Done  
8. Read the tutorial and tap Next until you are at the end  
of the tutorial. Tap Finish  
.
activate or deactivate the feature, then tap Next  
.
.
A checkmark indicates selection.  
9. Position your phone approximately 2-5 inches from the  
barcode. Ensure that the barcode is completely within  
the window. Keep your phone steady for best results.  
10. The scanner will automatically scan the barcode. It  
may take several seconds.  
7. Tap Add a Contact and select up to 5 people to add to  
your Allow list. These are contacts that you can call/  
receive calls from even while AutoReply is enabled. Tap  
Save after adding contacts.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
169  
   
8. Tap Next to confirm the Allow list contacts.  
9. Tap Enable (default) if you want to automaticaly enable  
DriveMode when you are driving, or Disable if you do  
not want it automatically enabled.  
Note: The first time you use AT&T Family Map, you will need to  
download the application from the Play Store. For more  
2. At the AT&T FamilyMap Sign In webpage, enter your  
Note: Your phone’s GPS determines when you are traveling  
Phone Number and Password in the appropriate fields  
over 25 MPH.  
and tap Submit  
.
10. Tap Finish, then read Take the Pledge  
.
Note: To sign up for service, visit http://www.att.com/familymap  
11. Tap Continue to complete application setup.  
for more information.  
12. Tap the steering wheel to begin using DriveMode.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
The  
icon will appear at the top of your display in  
the status bar.  
AT&T Locker  
AT&T Locker allows you to store, share, and sync all of your  
photos, videos, and documents in one safe, convenient  
AT&T FamilyMap  
AT&T FamilyMap provides peace of mind by being able to  
conveniently locate a family member from your wireless  
phone or PC and know that your family's location information  
is secure and private.  
AT&T Navigator  
AT&T Navigator provides you with access to real-time GPS-  
driven applications. These programs not only allow you to  
achieve turn-by-turn navigation, but also access local  
searches.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
FamilyMap  
AT&T  
.
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi  
Important! You must have a data plan to use this feature.  
With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery  
performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T  
Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi  
connections, and track your data use. For more information,  
Note: These services require the purchase of a subscription.  
To launch the AT&T Navigator application, follow these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
AT&T Navigator  
Browser  
.
The Browser is your access to the mobile web. For more  
2. Read the Terms of Service and tap Accept to  
acknowledge the terms of use.  
The first time that you use AT&T Navigator, the  
necessary files will be downloaded. The AT&T  
Navigator main screen displays.  
Calculator  
With this feature, you can use the phone as a calculator. The  
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition,  
subtraction, multiplication, and division. Turn the phone to  
the landscape position to use the scientific functions. The  
Calculator also keeps a history of recent calculations.  
3. Tap an AT&T Navigator plan that you choose to  
purchase.  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Calculator  
.
AT&T Ready2Go  
2. Enter the first number using the on-screen numeric  
keys.  
AT&T Ready2Go allows you to quickly and easily setup your  
phone by using the web browser on your PC. You can set-up  
email accounts, import contacts, set wallpaper, configure  
Wi-Fi and many more features. For more information, refer to  
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the  
corresponding on-screen arithmetic function key.  
4. Enter the second number.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
171  
             
5. To view the result, tap equals (  
=).  
• Week: displays the Week view.  
• Day: displays the Day view.  
6. To view calculator history, tap  
located at the  
top of the calculator buttons. A history of your past  
• List: displays the List view.  
calculations displays. Tap  
calculator keypad.  
again to display the  
Clear  
Text size. Tap  
Task: allows you to search for tasks.  
3. Tap  
event.  
(Create event) to create a new Calendar  
7. To clear the calculator history, press  
history  
.
4. Tap Today to display the current date indicated by a  
8. To change the text size, press  
blue box.  
Small, Medium, or Large.  
5. Tap Calendars to select the calendar options that you  
9. Press  
One-handed operation on to shift the  
want displayed.  
keyboard to the right so you can use the calculator  
using one hand.  
6. Press  
and select one of the following options:  
• Go to: displays a specific date.  
Calendar  
With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by  
day, week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act  
as a reminder, if necessary.  
• Delete: allows you to delete All events, All events before today,  
or an individual event.  
• Search: allows you to search within your current events.  
• Sync: allows you to synchronize your calendar with one or all of  
your accounts. This option only appears when an account has  
been opened.  
To access the Calendar:  
1. From the Home screen, Calendar  
.
2. Tap Show More) to display these tabs:  
(
• Settings: displays a list of configurable settings.  
Year: displays the Year view.  
• Month: displays the Month view.  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7. Tap  
(
Handwriting mode) to activate handwriting  
9. Tap Handwriting settings and configure handwriting-  
related calendar settings such as: First day of week  
and Show week number.  
mode. This allows you to jot down freehand notes  
using your S pen or finger.  
10. Tap Set alerts & notifications to adjust the event  
Calendar Settings  
1. From any Calendar view, press  
2. Tap Month view styles and select an option.  
3. Tap Week view and select a type: Timeline or Analog  
4. Tap First day of week and select either Local default,  
Saturday, Sunday or Monday  
notification method. Choose from: Alert  
,
Status bar  
Settings.  
notification, and Off  
.
11. Tap Select ringtone to assign a ringtone to a calendar  
event notification.  
.
12. Tap Vibration to set the Event notification tone to  
vibrate.  
.
5. Tap Hide declined events to activate this option. A check  
mark indicates selection.  
13. Tap Default reminder time to assign a default time  
frame for event reminders.  
6. Tap Lock time zone (to lock event time based on your  
current user-selected time zone). Select a time zone  
from within the Select time zone field.  
14. Tap Notifications while screen is off to display  
notifications on the full screen while it is turned off.  
15. Tap Quick responses to select quick responses to  
emailing guests.  
7. Tap Show week number to display the week numbers  
along the side of the week entries.  
16. Tap Swipe with two fingers to change the way events  
are displayed when swiped.  
8. Tap Calendars and select the type of general  
synchronization settings you want. A check mark  
indicates selection.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
173  
• Alarm repeat: use this option to set the repeating status for the  
alarm by tapping on the days that you want the alarm to sound.  
Tap the Repeat weekly checkbox to have the alarm repeat  
weekly.  
Camera  
Use your 8.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a  
JPEG format. Your phone also functions as a Camcorder to take  
videos.  
• Alarm type: sets the way in which the alarm sounds when  
activated (Melody, Vibration, Vibration and melody, and  
Briefing).  
ChatON  
With the ChatON application, you can interact with friends  
and family with text, images, hand-written notes and video  
shared instantly. You can chat in groups, while a Web client  
will allow the easy sharing of content and conversations  
• More: displays the following additional options:  
Alarm volume: drag the slider to adjust the alarm’s volume.  
Alarm tone: sets the sound file which is played when the  
alarm is activated. Select an option or tap Add for additional  
options.  
Clock  
Location alarm: when activated, the alarm only sounds  
when you are at a specific location. Touch and slide the  
The Clock application allows you to access alarms, view the  
World Clock, set a stopwatch, and use a timer.  
slider to the right to turn it on  
then follow the on-  
ON  
Alarm  
screen instructions to enter a location.  
This feature allows you to set an alarm to ring at a specific  
time.  
Snooze: use this option to set a Duration (3, 5, 10, 15, or 30  
Minutes) and Snooze repeat (1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 Times). Touch  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Create alarm. The following options display:  
• Time: tap Up) or Down to set the new time for the  
alarm to sound. Tap AM or PM.  
Clock  
Alarm  
and slide the slider to the right to turn it on  
.
ON  
(
(
)
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Smart alarm: tracks body movements and calculates the  
best time for sounding the alarm. Place the phone  
somewhere on your bed then the phone's movement sensor  
(also known as accelerometer) is sensitive enough to work  
from any part of the bed. Set the Interval and the Tone.  
Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on  
Deleting Alarms  
To delete an alarm, follow these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Delete  
Clock  
Alarm  
.
2. Tap the alarm or alarms you wish to delete. A green  
checkmark displays next to each selection.  
.
ON  
3. Tap Delete  
.
Name: allows you to use a specific name for the alarm. The  
name will appear on the display when the alarm activates.  
World Clock  
World Clock allows you to view the time of day or night in  
other parts of the world. World Clock displays time in  
hundreds of different cities, within all 24 time zones around  
the world.  
2. Tap Save to store the alarm details.  
Turning Off an Alarm  
To stop an alarm when it sounds, touch and drag the  
icon in any direction.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Clock  
World  
Clock. The clock for your time zone displays.  
Setting the Snooze Feature  
2. Tap Add city to add another city to the World Clock.  
3. Scroll through the list of cities to find the city you want  
to add, or tap the Search bar and use the keypad to  
enter a city to search for.  
To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds,  
Z
Z
touch and drag the  
icon in any direction. Snooze  
must first be set in the alarm settings. For more  
information, refer to “Alarm” on page 174.  
4. Tap the city you want to add. The clock for that city  
displays.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
175  
     
5. To set Daylight Savings time, press and hold a city,  
then tap DST settings  
6. Select Automatic Off, or 1 hour  
Timer  
.
You can use this option to set a countdown timer. Use a timer  
to count down to an event based on a preset time length  
(hours, minutes, and seconds).  
,
.
7. If Daylight Savings Time is selected, the sun symbol on  
the World Clock listing displays orange.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Clock  
Timer.  
2. The Minutes field is highlighted and set to 1 minute.  
Deleting a World Clock Entry  
Use the keypad to set the number of minutes you want.  
3. Tap the Hours field to set hours if desired. As you tap  
different fields, they highlight.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
clock Delete  
2. Tap the city clocks you wish to delete.  
Clock  
World  
.
4. Tap the Seconds field to set seconds.  
5. Tap Start to begin the timer and tap Stop to pause the  
timer.  
3. Tap Delete  
.
Stopwatch  
You can use this option to measure intervals of time.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Clock  
Stopwatch  
6. After stopping, tap Restart to continue or tap Reset to  
set the timer back to the original setting.  
.
Desk clock  
2. Tap Start to start the stopwatch and tap Lap to mark a  
unit of time per lap.  
You can use the Desk clock when you have a desk dock and  
you want your phone to display the time, day, date, location,  
and weather conditions when it is docked.  
3. Tap Stop to stop the stopwatch.  
4. Tap Restart to continue or tap Reset to erase all times  
recorded.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
clock  
The default Desk clock displays.  
Clock  
Desk  
.
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2. Tap the expand icon  
to expand the Desk clock and  
Music Player  
.
Crayon Physics  
view more options such as: Alarm  
,
,
Crayon Physics Deluxe is a game the uses two-dimensional  
physics, including gravity, mass, kinetic energy and transfer  
of momentum. The objective of the game is to guide a ball  
from a starting point so that it touches all of the stars placed  
on each level.  
Gallery  
,
Browser, and S Note  
3. To make changes, tap  
Settings.  
4. The following options display:  
• Hide status bar: hides the status bar on the display.  
• Wallpaper: select Default Gallery, or Same as home screen  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Crayon physics  
,
.
.
• Calendar: when this is checked, the time, day, and date  
displays. Tap to uncheck.  
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to play the game.  
DeviceHelp  
DeviceHelp provides online information to help with your  
phone questions.  
• Weather: when this is activated, the location, temperature, and  
weather condition is displayed. Touch and slide the slider to the  
right to turn it on  
.
ON  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
DeviceHelp  
.
• Dock: allows you to set your Dock settings such as Dock  
sound, Audio output mode, Desk home screen display, and  
Audio output.  
The AT&T Device Help screen displays.  
2. Follow the on-screen instructions for accessing helpful  
information.  
Contacts  
Downloads  
The Downloads application allows you to manage all of your  
downloads from the Play Store and the Browser.  
You can manage your daily contacts by storing their name  
and number in your Address Book. Address Book entries can  
be sorted by name, entry, or group.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Downloads.  
All of your downloads are listed.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
177  
             
2. Tap the Internet Downloads tab to see all of the  
downloads you have made from the Browser.  
3. Tap the Other Downloads tab to see all other  
downloads.  
– or –  
Tap Sign In to log into your previously created profile.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Gallery  
4. Tap Sort by size to see your downloads sorted in size  
order.  
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.  
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a  
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and  
share as a picture message. For more information, refer to  
5. Tap Sort by date to see your downloads sorted in date  
order.  
Email  
Gmail  
Email enablesyoutosendandreceive email using various email  
services. You can also receive text message alerts when you  
Gmail is a web-based email service. Gmail is configured  
when you first set up your phone. Depending on your  
synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically  
synchronize with your Gmail account on the web. For more  
Flipboard  
This application creates a personalized digital magazine out  
of everything being shared with you. Access news stories,  
personal feeds and other related material. Flip through your  
Facebook newsfeed, tweets from your Twitter account,  
photos from friends and much more.  
Google  
The Search application is the same on-screen Internet  
search engine that is on the Google Search Bar on your main  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Flipboard  
.
2. Tap Get started, select some on-screen categories and  
tap Done to create a new profile.  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
3. Tap on a business that you want to see the details for.  
4. The business details such as address, phone, website,  
and location are displayed. You can also see reviews  
from around the web and from Google users.  
Google +  
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a  
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream  
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast  
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant  
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your  
own private album on Google+. For more information, refer  
Maps  
Depending on your location, you can view basic, custom, and  
satellite maps and local business information, including  
locations, contact information, and driving directions. You  
can also post public messages about a location and track  
your friends.  
Live TV  
Live TV is a subscription service that allows you to watch  
your favorite TV shows using your handset. For more  
Important! Before using Google Maps you must have an active  
data connection. The Maps application does not  
cover every country or city.  
Local  
Local is an application that uses Google Maps and your  
location to help you find Restaurants, Cafes, Bars,  
Attractions, and other businesses. You can also add your own  
locations.  
Enabling a Location Source  
Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search  
for places of interest, you must enable a location source. To  
enable the location source you must enable the wireless  
network, or enable the Use GPS satellites option.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Local  
.
2. Tap on one of the business categories to search for a  
particular business.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Location services  
Settings  
All of the business categories that are close to you will  
be displayed.  
.
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
179  
                 
2. Tap the Use GPS satellites field. A green checkmark  
displays next to the field.  
Search: allows you to search for a place of  
interest.  
Note: Selecting Use GPS satellites allows you to locate places  
of interest at the street-level. However, this also requires  
a clear view of the sky and uses more battery power.  
Directions: displays navigation directions to a  
location from a starting point.  
Local: find Restaurants, Cafes, Bars, Attractions,  
and other businesses.  
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your phone in the  
following conditions:  
inside a building or between buildings  
in a tunnel or underground passage  
in poor weather  
Layers: additional items that you can have  
displayed on your map. They include Traffic,  
Satellite, Terrain, Transit Lines, Latitude, My  
Maps, Bicycling, and Wikipedia.  
around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields  
in a vehicle with tinted windows  
3. Press  
to display additional options.  
Using Maps  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Media Hub  
Maps  
.
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie  
and TV content. You can rent or purchase your favorite  
content and watch from the convenience of anywhere. For  
A map displays with your location in the very center.  
2. Icons for the following options are displayed at the  
bottom of the screen:  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Mini Diary  
.
Messages  
2. Tap Create diary and touch Yes at the Network  
The AT&T Messages app brings your texts, calls, and  
voicemail messages together into a single conversation  
thread and is accessible by phone or computer. For more  
information screen to acknowledge possible charges  
for Mini diary use.  
3. Tap the Tap to add photo field to add a photo.  
4. Tap Camera to take a new picture, Gallery to add a  
photo from your Gallery, or S Note to add an image from  
S Note.  
Messaging  
You can send and receive different types of messages. For  
Messenger  
5. Tap the Add location field to add your location then  
tap Done. If you have GPS activated, your present  
location will be added.  
Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into  
a simple group conversation. When you get a new  
conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your  
6. Tap the Tap to add text field to add text to your diary  
then tap Done  
7. Tap Done  
.
.
Mini Diary  
The Mini Diary allows you to keep a diary of your daily  
activities and also attach pictures. You can publish your diary  
entries to Facebook.  
The dairy entry is added to your Mini Diary with today’s  
date.  
8. While in a diary entry that has been previously saved,  
press  
to display the following options:  
• Delete: allows you to delete a diary entry.  
Important! A network connection is required to use Mini Diary.  
This may incur charges.  
• Go to: allows you to go to a selected date on the Calendar.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
181  
           
• Change photo: allows you to change your photo if you have  
already added one. This option only displays if a photo has  
been added.  
Music Player  
Music allows you to play music files that you have stored on  
your phone and memory card. You can also create playlists.  
• Delete photo: allows you to delete your photo. This option only  
displays if a photo has been added.  
My Files  
• Share via: allows you to send your Diary entry by Email or  
Messaging.  
My Files allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos,  
bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in  
one convenient location.  
9. At the Mini Diary screen, press  
to display the  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My Files  
.
following options:  
• Search: allows you to search your diaries for a particular word  
or words.  
2. The following folders display:  
• DCIM: this is the default location for pictures and videos taken  
by the device. Tap DCIM  
video files.  
Camera to view the picture or  
• Sort by: allows you to sort by Date or Location.  
• Delete all: allows you to delete all diary entries.  
• Settings: allows you to select Auto update which will update  
your Selected city based on GPS.  
• Android: the Android folder stores files that are used in Android  
applications.  
• external_sd: this folder displays all of the files that you have on  
your memory card.  
Mobile Hotspot  
This application allows you to share your phones’s mobile  
data connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot. For  
• Bluetooth: this folder stores files sent via a Bluetooth device.  
Note: Different folders may display depending on how your  
phone is configured.  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
myAT&T  
Navigation  
The myAT&T application allows you to manage your own  
AT&T account. You can review and pay your bill, check  
minutes and data usage, upgrade to a new device, or change  
your rate plan.  
Navigation is an internet-connected GPS navigation system  
with voice guidance. You can type or speak your destination.  
Note: For voice-guided navigation, you need to install text-to-  
speech support from the Play Store.  
Initial Setup  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
myAT&T  
.
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the  
following conditions:  
2. Sign into your Google Account. If you haven’t set up an  
inside a building or between buildings  
in a tunnel or underground passage  
in poor weather  
3. After signing into your Google Account, the Google Play  
Store displays the myAT&T application.  
around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields  
in a vehicle with tinted windows  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the app.  
Using myAT&T  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Launching Navigation  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
myAT&T  
.
Navigation  
.
The myAT&T page displays.  
2. Read the Navigation information page and tap Accept  
to continue or Don’t accept to exit.  
2. Read the Terms and Conditions and tap Accept to  
continue.  
3. Select one of the following options:  
3. Enter your Wireless # and Password using the onscreen  
• Speak destination: allows you to speak your destination.  
keypad, then tap Login  
.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
183  
       
• Type destination: allows you to use the keypad to enter your  
destination.  
The route will be displayed.  
4. If speaking the address, the Voice guidance screen is  
displayed. For voice-guided navigation you need to  
install text-to-speech support from the Play Store. Tap  
Install to install the application or tap Skip to exit.  
• Go home: takes you to your home address. The first time you  
are prompted to enter it.  
• Map: takes you to the map location of your present location  
using GPS.  
Note: You will need to be signed on to your Google account  
before downloading applications from the Play Store. For  
• Recent Destinations: allows you to access information on  
previous destinations you have used. This option only appears  
after you have entered one or more destinations.  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
5. As you drive the route display will be updated and you  
Obtaining Driving Directions  
will receive voice-guided navigation directions.  
Your phone’s built-in GPS hardware allows you to get real-  
time driving directions to selected locations or  
establishments based on your current location.  
Using a Physical Address  
6. Tap  
for additional options.  
Paper Artist  
Paper Artist provides access to an in-device graphics  
program. You can start from an empty canvas or import a  
picture from your Gallery to get you started.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Navigation  
.
2. Tap either Speak Destination or Type Destination  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Paper Artist  
.
3. If typing in the address, enter the address, City, and  
State using the keypad. As you type, possible  
addresses will be displayed. Tap on one when you see  
the address you want.  
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already  
Phone  
The Phone application allows you to access the dialer  
keypad, call logs, and favorites. For more information, refer  
3. At the Welcome! display, tap the shop icon  
browse the full catalog.  
to  
Play Books  
With Google Play Books, you can find more than 3 million  
free e-books and hundreds of thousands more to buy in the  
eBookstore.  
4. Sweep the screen to the left or right to view  
Categories, Featured, Top Selling, and New Arrivals.  
5. Tap a magazine to see more information and  
subscribe.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Play Books  
.
2. Log on to your Google account. For more information,  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions for using the Books  
applications.  
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to subscribe to a  
magazine.  
Play Movies & TV  
With Google Play Movies & TV, you can rent thousands of  
different movies and television shows. You can watch  
instantly, or download your movie or show for offline viewing  
Play Magazines  
With Google Play Magazines, you can subscribe to your  
favorite magazines and have them available to read on your  
phone at any time or any place.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Play Magazines  
.
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
185  
           
3. The first time you sign in, the Play Store Terms of  
Service display. Tap Accept to continue or Decline to  
exit.  
Play Music  
With Google Play Music, you can play music that you have  
added to your music file as well as any music you copied  
from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have  
copied from your PC.  
4. Tap Apps  
,
Music  
,
Books  
,
Magazines  
,
Movies & TV  
,
Games, or any other category displayed to download or  
purchase games or applications. You can also  
download updates to existing applications.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Play Music  
.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions for using the Music  
applications.  
5. Follow on the on-screen instructions.  
Polaris Office 4.0  
Polaris® Office 4.0 is a Microsoft Office compatible office  
suite. This application provides a central place for managing  
your documents online or offline.  
Play Store  
Play Store provides access to downloadable applications and  
games to install on your phone. Play Store also allows you to  
provide feedback and comments about an application, or flag  
an application that might be incompatible with your phone.  
The application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable  
Document Format) files.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
4.0  
Polaris Office  
Before using the Play Store you must have a Google Account.  
1. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already  
done so.  
.
2. Enter your Email information (if desired) and touch  
Register in the top right-hand corner of the display to  
complete the process.  
– or –  
2. From the main Home screen, tap Play Store  
.
Touch Skip to ignore this registration.  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Polaris Office  
4.0.  
S Note  
Use this application to create notes with productivity tools  
that turn handwriting into typed text and correct drawn  
shapes, lines, and formulas to make them perfect.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
S Note  
.
The S Note screen displays.  
Press S Pen button  
2. Read the information at the Learn about application  
pop-up and tap OK  
3. Tap Tutorial from the main S Note screen to  
2. Enter your note using the keypad or the S Pen.  
.
3. Tap  
S Note folder.  
From the main Home screen, tap  
Notes.  
when you are finished. Notes are saved in the  
learn more about the application, then follow the on-  
screen instructions.  
. to see all of your S  
S Note Lite  
S Suggest  
This application provides on-screen recommendations for  
applications that are specifically supported and made for use  
on your device.  
S Note Lite is an application that you can launch from any  
screen to take quick notes or jot down ideas. It’s a great way  
to take notes during a phone call or write down ideas while  
surfing the web.  
To launch S Note Lite, follow these steps:  
1. From any screen, hold the S Pen button and double-tap  
the screen.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
187  
       
Talk  
Note: Access to this feature requires that you already be  
logged in to your Samsung account application. For  
Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based application for  
instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are  
automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account.  
This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
S Suggest.  
2. Read the terms and conditions.  
Video Player  
The Video Player application plays video files stored on your  
3. Place a check mark in the Agree field then tap Agree  
4. Select an application from one of the available  
categories (Picks, Categories, Games, Friends, and  
Info.  
.
Voice Recorder  
5. Follow the on-screen download and installation  
instructions.  
The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to  
one minute long and then immediately share it using  
AllShare Play, Messaging, Gmail, or via Bluetooth. Recording  
time will vary based on the available memory within the  
phone.  
Settings  
This widget navigates to the sound and phone settings for  
your phone. It includes such settings as: display, security,  
memory, and any extra settings associated with your phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Recorder  
Voice  
.
2. To start recording, tap Record  
and speak into the  
microphone.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
3. During the recording process you can either tap Stop  
Limit for MMS: allows you to select On or Off. If you Limit for  
MMS by selecting On, you will be assured that the recording can  
be sent in a message.  
to stop and save the recording or Pause  
to  
temporarily halt the recording. After pausing, tap  
Record  
to resume recording. Once the audio  
Contextual filename: (requires GPS tagging) allows you to  
adjust the filename based on contextual information such as  
your current GPS location.  
recording has stopped, the message is automatically  
saved. Tap Cancel  
to cancel the recording  
without saving.  
Default name: allows you to choose the name prefix for your  
recordings. For example, if your Default name is Voice, your  
recordings would be named Voice 001, Voice 002, Voice 003,  
etc.  
4. Tap List  
to display a list of all your voice  
recordings. Tap a voice recording to play it.  
5. Press  
to display the following options:  
• Share via: allows you to share your recording using Bluetooth,  
Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
• End: allows you to close the application.  
Voice Search  
The Google Voice Search application allows you to search the  
web using only your voice.  
• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more voice recordings. Tap  
the recordings to delete and tap Delete  
.
• Settings: the following settings are available:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Voice Search  
.
Storage: allows you to choose where your recordings will be  
saved. Select between Phone or memory card.  
Recording quality: allows you to set the recording quality to  
High or Normal.  
2. When the Google Voice Search screen displays, speak  
the word or words that you would like to search for on  
the internet.  
3. If the timer expires and the mic icon changes from red  
to gray, tap the mic icon and speak the word or words  
that you would like to search for on the internet.  
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
189  
   
Results are displayed on your phone.  
clips, TV clips, and music videos, as well as video content  
such as video blogging, informational shorts and other  
original videos.  
4. The following options are available at the bottom of  
your screen:  
• Web: After selecting a different option, tap Web to return to the  
original search results.  
Note: YouTube is a data-intensive feature. It is recommended  
that you upgrade to a large data plan to avoid additional  
data charges.  
• Images: Displays images for your search.  
• Places: Displays places and businesses in your local area  
pertaining to your search.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
YouTube  
.
2. Tap the search field to search for specific videos,  
• More: After tapping More, sweep your screen to the left to see  
additional options such as News, Shopping, Videos, Blogs,  
Discussions, and Books.  
scroll down to browse through the main page  
thumbnails, or scroll to the bottom to explore additional  
options.  
Voice Talk  
3. To view a video, tap an available preview thumbnail or  
tap the title link.  
With the Voice Talk application you can use your voice to  
perform operations that you would normally have to do by  
hand such as dialing a phone number, texting a message,  
playing music, etc.  
4. To watch a high quality video, press  
Settings General High quality on mobile  
5. To configure your settings, press  
Settings  
6. Press  
and then tap  
.
and then tap  
.
YouTube  
and then tap Help for additional information.  
YouTube™ is a video sharing website on which users can  
upload and share videos. The site is used to display a wide  
variety of user-generated video content, including movie  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already  
Note: It is not necessary to sign in to the YouTube site to view  
content. However, if you wish to sign in to access  
additional options, access the page via the Web browser  
and tap Sign in at the top right corner, enter your  
YouTube or Google username and password, and tap  
3. Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA) and tap  
Accept to continue.  
Sign in  
.
4. Your location is found using GPS. Tap OK to allow  
YPmobile to use your current location.  
YPmobile  
5. Tap the Find a business nearby! field.  
The Yellowpages Mobile application provides quick and ready  
access to businesses, map locations, and storage of your  
favorite searches. This application allows you to tap into local  
businesses, locations, and events, connecting you to your  
search in real-time.  
6. Enter information in the What: and Near: fields and tap  
Search  
7. Results will be displayed.  
8. Tap to see the locations marked with pins on the  
map.  
.
Note: The first time you use YP, you will need to download the  
updated application from the Play Store. When the Play  
Store page displays, tap Update or Install then follow the  
9. Pinch the map screen inwards to zoom out or pinch it  
outwards to zoom in.  
10. Tap a pin to read information about the location.  
11. Tap  
to display additional options.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
YPmobile  
.
Applications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
191  
     
Section 11: Health and Safety Information  
with RF energy, these studies have failed to be replicated.  
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with  
using your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone”  
are used in this section to refer to your phone. Read this  
The majority of studies published have failed to show an  
association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell  
phone and health problems.  
information before using your mobile device  
.
The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the  
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at  
substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand-by  
mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects  
(by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not  
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health  
effects.  
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)  
Signals  
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published  
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)  
exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication  
includes the following information:  
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?  
The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not  
be confused with the effects from other types of  
electromagnetic energy.  
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will  
cause cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of  
scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health  
problems.  
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found  
in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues.  
Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away  
from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can  
permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the  
genetic material.  
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy.  
Over the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds  
of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio  
frequency energy emitted by cell phones. While some  
researchers have reported biological changes associated  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,  
including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great  
enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules.  
Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation.  
Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light,  
infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of electromagnetic  
radiation with relatively low frequencies.  
Interphone Study  
Interphone is a large international study designed to  
determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and  
neck cancer. A report published in the International Journal  
of Epidemiology (June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for  
more than 5,000 people with brain tumors (glioma and  
meningioma) and a similar number of healthy controls.  
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can  
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two  
areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly  
vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little  
blood flow in them to carry away excess heat.  
Research Results to Date: Is there a connection  
between RF and certain health problems?  
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In  
addition, attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies  
that have shown a connection have failed.  
Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused  
brain cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk  
of brain cancer from using cell phones. For people with the  
heaviest use of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour  
per day, every day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a  
slight increase in brain cancer. However, the authors  
determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions  
being drawn from this data. Additional information about  
Interphone can be found at  
Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did  
not answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional  
research is being conducted around the world, and the FDA  
continues to monitor developments in this field.  
The scientific community at large therefore believes that the  
weight of scientific evidence does not show an association  
between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones  
and adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community  
has supported additional research to address gaps in  
knowledge. Some of these studies are described below.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
193  
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users  
(COSMOS)  
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER)  
Program of the National Cancer Institute  
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health  
monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there  
are any health issues linked to long-term exposure to radio  
frequency energy from cell phone use. The COSMOS study  
will follow approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in  
Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional information about the  
COSMOS study can be found at  
The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer  
statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of  
new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk  
for brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell  
phone use has been common for quite some time in the U.S.  
Between 1987 and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence  
of brain cancer did not increase. Additional information about  
SEER can be found at  
.
.
Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio  
Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence  
(MOBI-KIDS)  
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the  
relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy  
from communication technologies including cell phones and  
brain cancer in young people. This is an international  
multi-center study involving 14 European and non-European  
countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be  
found at  
Cell Phone Industry Actions  
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA  
regulatory actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry  
to take a number of steps, including the following:  
Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF  
for the type of signal emitted by cell phones;  
Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to  
the user; and  
Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current  
information on cell phone use and human health concerns.  
http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/  
view.php?ID=39.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting  
bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics  
Engineers (IEEE), the International Commission on  
Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), and others to  
assure that safety standards continue to adequately protect  
the public.  
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the  
phone is held away from the head in the user's hand or in  
approved body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in  
the U.S. are required to meet RF exposure compliance  
requirements when used against the head and against the  
body.  
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF  
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that  
hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for  
convenience and comfort. They are also required by law in  
many states if you want to use your phone while driving.  
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head  
from RF Radiation  
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF  
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that  
accessories which claim to shield the head from those  
emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield  
the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while  
others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory  
attached to the phone.  
Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other  
Accessories  
Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy  
If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency  
energy (RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not  
know that there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are  
concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take  
a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure.  
Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;  
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between  
your head and the cell phone.  
Hands-Free Kits  
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets  
and various types of body-worn accessories such as  
belt-clips and holsters. Combinations of these can be used to  
reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
195  
 
Studies have shown that these products generally do not  
work as advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called  
“shields” may interfere with proper operation of the phone.  
The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate,  
leading to an increase in RF absorption.  
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from  
various sources can be obtained from the following  
organizations (updated 10/1/2010):  
FCC RF Safety Program:  
Children and Cell Phones  
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):  
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):  
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)  
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):  
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users  
of cell phones from RF exposure, including children and  
teenagers. The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure  
apply to children and teenagers as well.  
Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;  
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between  
the head and the cell phone.  
World Health Organization (WHO):  
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have  
advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones  
at all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United  
Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000.  
In this report, a group of independent experts noted that no  
evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors  
or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit cell phone  
use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based  
on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.  
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:  
Health Protection Agency:  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
US Food and Drug Administration:  
expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC  
requires wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1.6  
watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).  
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/  
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/  
The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety  
to give additional protection to the public and to account for  
any variations in measurements.  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)  
Certification Information  
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is  
designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure  
limits for Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal  
Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.  
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions  
accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its  
highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands.  
Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified  
power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while  
These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the  
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National  
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP)  
and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers  
(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed  
by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry,  
government, and academia after extensive reviews of the  
scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF  
energy.  
operating can be well below the maximum reported value.  
This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple  
power levels so as to use only the power required to reach  
the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base  
station antenna, the lower the power output of the phone.  
Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public,  
it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not  
exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC. Tests for each  
model phone are performed in positions and locations (e.g. at  
the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC. For  
body-worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets  
The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile  
phones employs a unit of measurement known as the  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the  
rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
197  
   
FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory  
that contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a  
minimum of 1.0 cm from the body.  
typical or maximum SAR for a particular phone. Additional  
SAR information can also be obtained at  
.
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with  
FCC RF exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an  
Equipment Authorization for this mobile device with all  
reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC  
RF exposure guidelines. This [mobile phone/tablet/device]  
has a FCC ID number: A3LSGHI717 [Model Number: SGH-  
I717] and the specific SAR levels for this [mobile phone/  
tablet/device] can be found at the following FCC website:  
FCC Part 15 Information to User  
Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned  
that changes or modifications not expressly approved by  
Samsung could void your authority to operate the device.  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This  
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
The SAR information for this device can also be found on  
Samsung’s website: http://www.samsung.com/sar  
.
.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply  
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part  
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a  
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and  
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and  
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications.  
SAR information on this and other model phones can be  
accessed online on the FCC's website through http://  
transition.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/sar.html. To find information that  
pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the phone  
FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the  
case of the phone. Sometimes it may be necessary to  
remove the battery pack to find the number. Once you have  
the FCC ID number for a particular phone, follow the  
instructions on the website and it should provide values for  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not  
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,  
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and  
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference  
by one or more of the following measures:  
eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that  
your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes  
impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting responsible  
driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand  
and address distractions.  
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices  
and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always  
obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or  
restricted in certain areas. For example, only hands-free use  
may be permitted in certain areas.  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is connected.  
Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the  
call go to voicemail when driving conditions require.  
Remember, driving comes first, not the call!  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Smart Practices While Driving  
On the Road - Off the Phone  
If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these  
tips:  
The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe  
operation of his or her vehicle.  
Use a hands-free device;  
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task  
should be performed while driving whether it be eating,  
drinking, talking to passengers, or talking on a mobile phone  
- unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is  
confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their  
primary responsibility. Do not engage in any activity while  
driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your  
Secure your phone within easy reach;  
Place calls when you are not moving;  
Plan calls when your car will be stationary;  
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;  
Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are  
driving and will suspend the call if necessary;  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
199  
   
Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;  
Battery Use and Safety  
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in  
an automobile:  
Important! Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or  
damage. Most battery issues arise from improper  
handling of batteries and, particularly, from the  
continued use of damaged batteries.  
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or  
near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law  
may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in  
the automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or  
ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in  
an automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could  
result in fines, penalties, or other damages.  
Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise  
attempt to change the form of your battery. Do not put a high  
degree of pressure on the battery. This can cause leakage or an  
internal short-circuit, resulting in overheating.  
Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the  
driver's clear view of the street and traffic.  
Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids.  
Liquids can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion.  
Even when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate  
normally, the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety  
hazard. If the phone and/or battery get wet, have them checked  
by your service provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear  
to be working properly.  
Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web  
browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle.  
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video  
games while operating a vehicle.  
For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org  
.
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive  
heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the  
phone or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery  
with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair  
dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your phone in your car in  
high temperatures.  
Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects. Accidental  
short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key,  
jewelry, clip, or pen) causes a direct connection between the +  
and - terminals of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for  
example when you carry a spare battery in a pocket or bag.  
Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the  
object causing the short-circuiting.  
Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire. The phone  
or the battery may explode when overheated.  
Important! Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and  
recharge your battery only with  
Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery. Do not let leaking  
battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For  
safe disposal options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized  
service center.  
Samsung-approved chargers which are  
specifically designed for your phone.  
Avoid dropping the cell phone. Dropping the phone or the  
battery, especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause  
damage to the phone and battery. If you suspect damage to the  
phone or battery, take it to a service center for inspection.  
WARNING!  
Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may  
present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard  
Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the phone  
caused by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or  
chargers.  
.
Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way  
.
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
201  
Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers  
Some websites and second-hand dealers not associated with  
reputable manufacturers and carriers, might be selling  
incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers.  
Consumers should purchase manufacturer or  
.
Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and  
accessories may not be available in your area.  
We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung  
mobile device by working with respected take-back  
companies in every state in the country.  
Drop It Off  
carrier-recommended products and accessories. If unsure about  
whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible, contact  
the manufacturer of the battery or charger.  
You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device  
and batteries for recycling at one of our numerous  
Samsung Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these  
locations may be found at:  
.
Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and  
charging devices could result in damage to the equipment  
and a possible risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to  
serious injuries, damages to your phone, or other serious  
hazard  
.
Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted  
at these locations for no fee.  
Samsung Mobile Products and  
Recycling  
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its  
customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine  
Samsung accessories.  
Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or  
batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations  
where mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional  
information regarding specific locations may be found at:  
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not  
only important for safety, it benefits the environment.  
Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly.  
.
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Mail It In  
Warning! Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may  
The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide  
Samsung customers with a free recycling mailing label.  
Just go to  
A_recyle_your_phone_page and follow the instructions to  
print out a free pre-paid postage label and then send your  
old mobile device or battery to the address listed, via U.S.  
Mail, for recycling.  
explode.  
UL Certified Travel Charger  
The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL  
safety requirements. Please adhere to the following safety  
instructions per UL guidelines:  
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY  
LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE  
PROPERTY DAMAGE.  
Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved  
recycler.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS.  
To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:  
Or call, (877) 278-0799.  
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR  
ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS.  
Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile  
devices and batteries  
Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance  
with local regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these  
items in household or business trash may be prohibited. Help  
us protect the environment - recycle!  
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH  
AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR  
OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE  
POWER OUTLET.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
203  
   
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A  
TOUCH-SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE  
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE  
CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR  
HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION.  
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display,  
please note that a touch-screen responds best to a  
light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic  
stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object when  
pressing on the touch-screen may damage the  
tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For  
more information, please refer to the “Standard  
Limited Warranty”.  
Display / Touch-Screen  
Please note the following information when using your  
mobile device:  
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY  
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or  
acrylic and could break if your mobile device is  
dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use  
if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause  
injury to you.  
GPS  
Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning  
System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS  
uses satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are  
subject to changes implemented in accordance with the  
Department of Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio  
navigation Plan (FRP). Changes may affect the performance  
of location-based technology on your mobile device.  
Even with GPS, when you make an emergency call:  
Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of  
your ability; and  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency  
responder instructs you.  
make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be  
switched on and in a service area with adequate signal  
strength.  
Navigation  
Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile  
device networks or when certain network services and/or  
mobile device features are in use. Check with local service  
providers.  
Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data  
relating to your current location, may contain inaccurate or  
incomplete data, and circumstances can and do change over  
time. In some areas, complete information may not be  
available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that  
the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see  
before following them. All users should pay attention to road  
conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may  
impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs.  
To make an emergency call:  
1. If the mobile device is not on, switch it on.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
and use the on-screen  
keypad.  
3. Key in the emergency number for your present location  
(for example, 911 or other official emergency number).  
Emergency numbers vary by location.  
Emergency Calls  
This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates  
using radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well  
as user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee  
connection in all conditions, areas, or circumstances.  
4. Tap  
to make the call.  
If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you  
may first need to deactivate those features before you can  
make an emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your  
local cellular service provider. When making an emergency  
call, remember to give all the necessary information as  
accurately as possible. Remember that your mobile device  
Therefore, you should never rely solely on any wireless  
mobile device for essential communications (medical  
emergencies, for example). Before traveling in remote or  
underdeveloped areas, plan an alternate method of  
contacting emergency services personnel. Remember, to  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
205  
   
may be the only means of communication at the scene of an  
Extreme heat or cold  
accident; do not cut off the call until given permission to do  
so.  
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C /  
113°F.  
Care and Maintenance  
Microwaves  
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and  
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The  
suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty  
obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many  
years:  
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.  
Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.  
Dust and dirt  
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.  
Cleaning solutions  
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:  
Liquids of any kind  
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong  
detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft  
cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water  
solution.  
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and  
liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic  
circuits. If the mobile device does get wet, do not  
accelerate drying with the use of an oven, microwave, or  
dryer, because this may damage the mobile device and  
could cause a fire or explosion.  
Shock or vibration  
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough  
handling can break internal circuit boards.  
Paint  
Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so  
may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the  
mobile device.  
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the  
device’s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent  
proper operation.  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
that are used. As a result, there is no single volume setting  
that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of  
sound, settings, and equipment.  
Responsible Listening  
Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss  
.
You should follow some common sense recommendations  
when using any portable audio device:  
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud  
sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as  
sound is played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged  
exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most  
common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific  
research suggests that using portable audio devices, such as  
portable music players and cell phones, at high volume  
settings for long durations may lead to permanent  
noise-induced hearing loss.  
Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into  
an audio source.  
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest  
volume at which you can hear adequately.  
Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time,  
not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your  
hearing.  
This includes the use of headphones (including headsets,  
earbuds, and Bluetooth® or other wireless devices).  
Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in  
some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear),  
hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual  
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential  
hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound  
produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the  
nature of the sound, the device settings, and the headphones  
When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot  
hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to  
you can hear what you are listening to.  
Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you  
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment,  
use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background  
environmental noise. By blocking background environment noise,  
noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music  
at lower volumes than when using earbuds.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
207  
   
Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less  
time is required before you hearing could be affected.  
Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises,  
such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss.  
Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound  
normal.  
National Institute on Deafness and Other  
Communication Disorders  
National Institutes of Health  
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320  
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320  
Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you  
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or  
experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your  
portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.  
Internet:  
National Institute for Occupational Safety  
and Health (NIOSH)  
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the  
following sources:  
395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200  
Patriots Plaza Building  
Washington, DC 20201  
American Academy of Audiology  
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH  
(1-800-356-4674)  
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)  
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328  
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300  
Reston, VA 20190  
Voice: (800) 222-2336  
Internet:  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Implantable Medical Devices  
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained  
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an  
implantable medical device, such as a pacemaker or  
implantable cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential  
interference with the device.  
Internet:  
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/  
default.html  
1-888-232-6348 TTY  
Persons who have such devices:  
Operating Environment  
Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches  
from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is  
turned ON;  
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any  
area, and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is  
forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or  
danger. When connecting the mobile device or any accessory  
to another device, read its user's guide for detailed safety  
instructions. Do not connect incompatible products.  
Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic  
Devices  
Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;  
Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to  
minimize the potential for interference;  
Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any  
reason to suspect that interference is taking place;  
Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of  
your implantable medical device. If you have any questions about  
using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical  
device, consult your health care provider.  
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio  
Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic  
equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from  
your wireless mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to  
discuss alternatives.  
For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-  
.
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
209  
   
Other Medical Devices  
or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are  
advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling  
point (service station).  
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the  
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately  
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able  
to assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your  
mobile device off in health care facilities when any  
regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so.  
Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment  
that could be sensitive to external RF energy.  
Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the  
use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and  
distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasting  
operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive  
atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They  
include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage  
facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as  
propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals  
or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any  
other area where you would normally be advised to turn off  
your vehicle engine.  
Vehicles  
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately  
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with  
the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle  
before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You  
should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that  
has been added to your vehicle.  
Posted Facilities  
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted  
notices require you to do so.  
When your Device is Wet  
Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is  
already on, turn it off and remove the battery immediately (if  
the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery,  
leave it as-is). Then, dry the device with a towel and take it  
to a service center.  
Potentially Explosive Environments  
Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a  
potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and  
instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
be able to use a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out  
the mobile device with your hearing device is the best way to  
evaluate it for your personal needs.  
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)  
Regulations for Wireless Devices  
The U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has  
established requirements for digital wireless mobile devices  
to be compatible with hearing aids and other assistive  
hearing devices.  
M-Ratings: Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet  
FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference  
to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled.  
M4 is the better/higher of the two ratings. M-ratings refer to  
enabling acoustic coupling with hearing aids that do not  
operate in telecoil mode.  
When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices  
(hearing aids and cochlear implants) use wireless mobile  
devices, they may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining  
noise. Some hearing devices are more immune than others  
to this interference noise, and mobile devices also vary in the  
amount of interference they generate.  
T-Ratings: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC  
requirements and are likely to generate less interference to  
hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. T4  
is the better/higher of the two ratings. T-ratings refer to  
enabling inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in  
telecoil mode.  
The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating  
system for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device  
users find mobile devices that may be compatible with their  
hearing devices. Not all mobile devices have been rated.  
Mobile devices that are rated have the rating on their box or  
a label located on the box.  
Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing aid  
manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you  
find this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device  
is relatively immune to interference noise.  
The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending  
on the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing  
device happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not  
Under the current industry standard, American National  
Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19, the hearing aid and  
wireless mobile device rating values are added together to  
indicate how usable they are together. For example, if a  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
211  
   
hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless  
mobile device meets the M3 level rating, the sum of the two  
values equals M5.  
The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in  
the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19  
standard.  
HAC for Newer Technologies  
Under the standard, this should provide the hearing aid user  
with normal use while using the hearing aid with the  
particular wireless mobile device. A sum of 6 or more would  
indicate excellent performance.  
This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing  
aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses.  
However, there may be some newer wireless technologies  
used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with  
hearing aids.  
However, these are not guarantees that all users will be  
satisfied. T ratings work similarly.  
It is important to try the different features of this phone  
thoroughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid  
or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering  
noise. Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of  
this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility. If you  
have questions about return or exchange policies, consult  
your service provider or phone retailer.  
M3  
+
M2  
=
5
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile Device  
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play  
with it because they could hurt themselves and others,  
damage the mobile device, or make calls that increase your  
mobile device bill.  
T3  
+
T2  
=
5
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out  
of the reach of small children.  
Although your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex  
piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping,  
hitting, bending, or sitting on it.  
FCC Notice and Cautions  
Other Important Safety Information  
FCC Notice  
Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or  
install the mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service  
may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to  
the device.  
The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used  
in close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can  
require you to stop using the mobile device if such  
interference cannot be eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied  
petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) must comply with  
the National Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy  
of this standard, contact the National Fire Protection  
Association.  
Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in  
your vehicle are securely mounted.  
Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your  
vehicle is mounted and operating properly.  
Cautions  
When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can  
build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical  
shock. To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the  
headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or  
touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static  
electricity before inserting the headset.  
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not  
expressly approved in this document could void your  
warranty for this equipment and void your authority to  
operate this equipment. Only use approved batteries,  
antennas, and chargers. The use of any unauthorized  
accessories may be dangerous and void the mobile device  
warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the  
mobile device.  
Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive  
materials in the same compartment as the mobile device, its  
parts, or accessories.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
213  
       
For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag  
inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed  
or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air  
bag or in the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is  
improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could  
result.  
Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively  
perform actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a  
touch screen with your fingers, or playing games, you may  
experience occasional discomfort in your hands, neck, shoulders,  
or other parts of your body. When using your device for extended  
periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly,  
and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have discomfort  
during or after such use, stop use and see a physician.  
Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use  
of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be  
dangerous to the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate  
authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on  
an aircraft.  
If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or  
light close to the eyes of people or pets. [122011]  
Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension  
or denial of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or  
both.  
While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do  
not hold the screen too close to your eyes.  
Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing  
lights while watching videos or playing games for extended  
periods. If you feel any discomfort, stop using the device  
immediately.  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 12: Warranty Information  
This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage  
resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal  
conditions, improper storage, exposure to liquid, moisture,  
dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or unusual physical,  
electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches, dents  
and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG;  
(c) defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use  
of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen;  
(d) equipment that has the serial number or the  
Standard Limited Warranty  
What is covered and for how long?  
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC  
(“SAMSUNG”) warrants that SAMSUNG’s handsets and  
accessories (“Products”) are free from defects in material  
and workmanship under normal use and service for the  
period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first  
consumer purchaser and continuing for the following  
specified period of time after that date:  
enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged,  
altered or made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear;  
(f) defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in  
conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or  
ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by  
SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper  
testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or  
adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG;  
(h) defects or damage resulting from external causes such as  
collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm,  
lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft,  
blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source;  
(i) defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception  
Phone  
1 Year  
Batteries  
1 Year  
Case/Pouch/Holster  
90 Days  
Other Phone Accessories 1 Year  
What is not covered?  
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the  
Product.  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
215  
       
or transmission, or viruses or other software problems  
introduced into the Product; or (j) Product used or purchased  
outside the United States. This Limited Warranty covers  
batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated  
capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does  
not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a  
battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for  
charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are  
broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has  
been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for  
which it is specified.  
remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original  
Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. All  
replaced Products, parts, components, boards and  
equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. Except to  
any extent expressly allowed by applicable law, transfer or  
assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited.  
What must you do to obtain warranty service?  
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, you must  
return the Product to an authorized phone service facility in  
an adequate container for shipping, accompanied by the  
sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the  
original date of purchase, the serial number of the Product  
and the seller’s name and address.  
What are SAMSUNG’s obligations?  
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product  
is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited  
Warranty, SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, at  
SAMSUNG’s sole option, without charge. SAMSUNG may, at  
SAMSUNG’s sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new  
parts or components when repairing any Product, or may  
replace the Product with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new  
Product.  
To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, please  
call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-888-987-4357. If  
SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this  
Limited Warranty, you must pay all parts, shipping, and labor  
charges for the repair or return of such Product.  
You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of  
the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for  
warranty service, as some or all of the contents may be  
deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service.  
Repaired/replaced cases, pouches and holsters will be  
warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other repaired/  
replaced Products will be warranted for a period equal to the  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What are the limits on SAMSUNG’s liability?  
OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR  
THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH  
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH  
THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE.  
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES,  
OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY  
SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS  
SOLELY WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER  
OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT.  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF  
SAMSUNG’S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE  
REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS.  
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT  
LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO  
THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT  
SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF  
THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR, WITHOUT  
LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT; LOSS OF  
USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL,  
PROFITS OR SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL,  
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR  
DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE  
PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT  
ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY  
LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL  
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS  
AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be  
construed to create an express warranty of any kind with  
respect to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer,  
representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend  
this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or  
claims, whether in advertising, presentations or otherwise,  
on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited  
Warranty.  
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you  
may also have other rights that vary from state to state.  
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS,  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO  
THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
217  
What is the procedure for resolving disputes?  
For any arbitration in which your total damage claims,  
exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are  
$5,000.00 or less (“Small Claim”), the arbitrator may, if you  
prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness  
fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant  
SAMSUNG its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs  
unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad  
faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no  
more than half of the total administrative, facility and  
arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and  
SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees.  
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in  
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees  
and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (“Large Claim”)  
shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim  
case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or  
apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees,  
expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on  
the arbitrator’s award in any court of competent jurisdiction.  
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR  
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED  
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION,  
AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY.  
Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with  
a dispute involving any other person’s or entity’s Product or  
claim, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,  
shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class  
action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single  
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,  
the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall  
be conducted according to the American Arbitration  
Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to  
consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered  
pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State  
of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,  
shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all  
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The  
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and  
application of this arbitration provision and the Limited  
Warranty.  
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against  
SAMSUNG’s employees, representatives and affiliates if any  
such claim arises from the Product’s sale, condition or  
performance.  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by  
providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days  
from the date of the first consumer purchaser’s purchase of the  
Product. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to  
Severability  
If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or  
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall  
not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited  
Warranty.  
[email protected], with the subject line: “Arbitration  
Opt Out.” You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name  
and address; (b) the date on which the Product was purchased;  
(c) the Product model name or model number; and (d) the IMEI  
or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI  
or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the Product box;  
(ii) on the Product information screen, which can be found  
under “Settings;” (iii) on a label on the back of the Product  
beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the  
outside of the Product if the battery is not removable).  
Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no  
later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer  
purchaser’s purchase of the Product and providing the same  
information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be  
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting  
out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the  
coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will  
continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty.  
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal  
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using  
the standard methods, the data only appears to be removed  
on a superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to  
retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software.  
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of  
this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to  
Samsung’s Customer Care Center for an Extended File  
System (EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and  
return all settings to default settings. Please contact the  
Samsung Customer Care Center for details.  
Important! Please provide warranty information (proof of  
purchase) to Samsung’s Customer Care Center in  
order to provide this service at no charge. If the  
warranty has expired on the device, charges may  
apply.  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
219  
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC  
1301 E. Lookout Drive  
Richardson, Texas 75082  
("Software"). Samsung Electronics Co. is a separate company  
from the company that provides the limited warranty for this  
mobile device, Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC.  
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG  
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)  
©2012 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. All  
rights reserved.  
This device requires the use of preloaded software in its  
normal operation. BY USING THE DEVICE OR ITS PRELOADED  
SOFTWARE, YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU  
DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR  
THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, RETURN THE DEVICE TO THE  
RETAILER FOR A REFUND OR CREDIT.  
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior  
written approval. Specifications and availability subject to  
change without notice. [111611]  
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung Electronics Co. grants you  
the following rights provided that you comply with all terms  
and conditions of this EULA: You may install, use, access,  
display and run one copy of the Software on the local hard  
disk(s) or other permanent storage media of one computer  
and use the Software on a single computer or a mobile  
device at a time, and you may not make the Software  
available over a network where it could be used by multiple  
computers at the same time. You may make one copy of the  
Software in machine readable form for backup purposes  
only; provided that the backup copy must include all  
copyright or other proprietary notices contained on the  
original.  
End User License Agreement for  
Software  
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License  
Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you  
(either an individual or a single entity) and Samsung  
Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung Electronics Co.") for  
software, owned by Samsung Electronics Co. and its  
affiliated companies and its third party suppliers and  
licensors, that accompanies this EULA, which includes  
computer software and may include associated media,  
printed materials, "online" or electronic documentation  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung  
Electronics Co. reserves all rights not expressly granted to  
you in this EULA. The Software is protected by copyright and  
other intellectual property laws and treaties. Samsung  
Electronics Co. or its suppliers own the title, copyright and  
other intellectual property rights in the Software. The  
Software is licensed, not sold.  
customized services or technologies to you and will not  
disclose this information in a form that personally identifies  
you.  
5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements  
and add-on components (if any) of the Software that  
Samsung Electronics Co. may provide to you or make  
available to you after the date you obtain your initial copy of  
the Software, unless we provide other terms along with such  
upgrade. To use Software identified as an upgrade, you must  
first be licensed for the Software identified by Samsung  
Electronics Co. as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading,  
you may no longer use the Software that formed the basis for  
your upgrade eligibility.  
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse  
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to  
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software  
(except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly  
permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation),  
or modify, or disable any features of, the Software, or create  
derivative works based on the Software. You may not rent,  
lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting  
services with the Software.  
6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or  
the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party  
unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device  
which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer  
must include all of the Software (including all component  
parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this  
EULA) and you may not retain any copies of the Software.  
The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a  
consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the  
Software must agree to all the EULA terms.  
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung  
Electronics Co. and its affiliates may collect and use  
technical information gathered as part of the product support  
services related to the Software provided to you, if any.  
Samsung Electronics Co. and its affiliates may use this  
information solely to improve their products or to provide  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
221  
7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the  
Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries.  
You agree to comply with all applicable international and  
national laws that apply to the Software, including the U.S.  
Export Administration Regulations, as well as end user, end  
use, and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other  
governments.  
WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, LACK  
OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON INFRINGEMENT OF  
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS.  
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR  
LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE  
EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO  
ADVICE OR INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN,  
OBTAINED BY YOU FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. OR  
ITS AFFILIATES SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS  
8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your  
rights under this License will terminate automatically without  
notice from Samsung Electronics Co. if you fail to comply  
with any of the terms and conditions of this EULA. Upon  
termination of this EULA, you must cease all use of the  
Software and destroy all copies, full or partial, of the  
Software.  
DISCLAIMER BY SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. OF WARRANTY  
REGARDING THE SOFTWARE, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY  
OF ANY SORT FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO.  
10. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third party  
applications may be included with, or downloaded to this  
mobile device. Samsung Electronics Co. makes no  
9. Disclaimer of Warranty. ALL SOFTWARE PROVIDED BY  
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE IS  
PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN "AS AVAILABLE" BASIS,  
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM SAMSUNG  
ELECTRONICS CO., EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE  
FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE  
LAW, SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DISCLAIMS ALL  
WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY,  
representations whatsoever about any of these applications.  
Since Samsung Electronics Co. has no control over such  
applications, you acknowledge and agree that Samsung  
Electronics Co. is not responsible for the availability of such  
applications and is not responsible or liable for any content,  
advertising, products, services, or other materials on or  
available from such applications. You expressly acknowledge  
and agree that use of third party applications is at your sole  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality,  
DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE OF  
INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD  
PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.  
performance, accuracy and effort is with you. It is up to you  
to take precautions to ensure that whatever you select to use  
is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan horses, and  
other items of a destructive nature. References on this  
mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of  
any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to you,  
and do not constitute or imply an endorsement, sponsorship,  
or recommendation of, or affiliation with the third party or its  
products and services. You agree that Samsung Electronics  
Co. shall not be responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for  
any damage or loss caused or alleged to be caused by, or in  
connection with, use of or reliance on any such third party  
content, products, or services available on or through any  
such application. You acknowledge and agree that the use of  
any third-party application is governed by such third party  
application provider's Terms of Use, License Agreement,  
Privacy Policy, or other such agreement and that any  
11. Disclaimer of Warranty Regarding Third Party  
Applications. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DOES NOT  
WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING  
THE AVAILABILITY, USE, TIMELINESS, SECURITY, VALIDITY,  
ACCURACY, OR RELIABILITY OF, OR THE RESULTS OF THE  
USE OF, OR OTHERWISE RESPECTING, THE CONTENT OF ANY  
THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WHETHER SUCH THIRD PARTY  
APPLICATION IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT  
DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., IS  
DOWNLOADED, OR OTHERWISE OBTAINED. USE OF ANY  
THIRD PARTY APPLICATION IS DONE AT YOUR OWN  
DISCRETION AND RISK AND YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE  
FOR ANY DAMAGE TO THE MOBILE DEVICE OR LOSS OF DATA  
THAT RESULTS FROM THE DOWNLOADING OR USE OF SUCH  
THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO.  
EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING  
WHETHER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY  
ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO  
WHICH SUCH PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY  
SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER. ANY THIRD  
PARTY APPLICATIONS PROVIDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE  
information or personal data you provide, whether knowingly  
or unknowingly, to such third-party application provider, will  
be subject to such third party application provider's privacy  
policy, if such a policy exists. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO.  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
223  
ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN "AS AVAILABLE" BASIS,  
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM SAMSUNG  
ELECTRONICS CO., EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE  
FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE  
LAW, SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DISCLAIMS ALL  
WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY,  
ADVICE OR INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN,  
OBTAINED BY YOU FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. OR  
ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY SHALL BE DEEMED TO  
ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY REGARDING THIRD  
PARTY APPLICATIONS, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY BY  
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO.  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR  
12. Limitation of Liability. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. WILL  
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING  
OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE  
THE SOFTWARE OR ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION, ITS  
CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS,  
OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN  
OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE  
TO CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, IN-APP PURCHASES,  
AND ALL OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,  
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF  
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO  
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL  
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS  
OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, LACK  
OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON INFRINGEMENT OF  
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS.  
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST  
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE THIRD  
PARTY APPLICATION, THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN  
THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL MEET YOUR  
REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE THIRD PARTY  
APPLICATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE, OR  
THAT DEFECTS IN THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE  
CORRECTED. YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL  
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR, OR CORRECTION. SOME  
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR  
LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE  
EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO  
NOTWITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG  
ELECTRONIC CO.'S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR  
OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE  
OR THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR  
ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS EULA, SHALL NOT EXCEED  
THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS  
MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION  
THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE. THE  
FOREGOING LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS  
(INCLUDING SECTIONS 9, 10, 11 AND 12) SHALL APPLY TO  
THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW,  
EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.  
14. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of  
TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This  
EULA shall not be governed by the UN Convention on  
Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the application  
of which is expressly excluded.  
15. DISPUTE RESOLUTION.  
(a) Non-United States residents. If a dispute, controversy or  
difference is not amicably settled, it shall be finally resolved  
by arbitration in Seoul, Korea in accordance with the  
Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial Arbitration Board.  
The award of arbitration shall be final and binding upon the  
parties.  
13. U.S. Government End Users Restricted Rights. The  
Software is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as  
"commercial items" consisting of "commercial software"  
and "commercial software documentation" with only those  
rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the  
terms and conditions herein. All Products are provided only  
with "restricted rights" with only those rights as are granted  
to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions  
herein. All Software and Products are provided subject to  
Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 52.227.19.  
(b) United States residents. ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG  
ELECTRONICS CO. ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS EULA OR  
YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE RESOLVED  
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION,  
AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. Any such dispute shall not  
be combined or consolidated with any other person's or  
entity's claim or dispute, and specifically, without limitation  
of the foregoing, shall not under any circumstances proceed  
as part of a class action. The arbitration shall be conducted  
before a single arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in  
form or amount, the relief allowed by the applicable law. The  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
225  
arbitration shall be conducted according to the American  
Arbitration Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules  
applicable to consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is  
entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of  
the State of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws  
principles, shall govern the interpretation of the EULA and all  
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The  
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and  
application of this arbitration provision and the EULA. For  
any arbitration in which your total damage claims, exclusive  
of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or  
less ("Small Claim"), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award  
your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs  
as part of any award, but may not grant Samsung Electronics  
Co. its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs unless it is  
determined that the claim was brought in bad faith. In a  
Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no more than  
half of the total administrative, facility and arbitrator fees, or  
$50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and Samsung  
Electronics Co. shall pay the remainder of such fees.  
case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or  
apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees,  
expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on  
the arbitrator's award in any court of competent jurisdiction.  
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against  
Samsung Electronics Co.'s employees, representatives and  
affiliates if any such claim arises from the licensing or use of  
the Software. You may opt out of this dispute resolution  
procedure by providing notice to Samsung Electronics Co. no  
later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first  
consumer purchaser's purchase of this device. To opt out,  
you must send notice by e-mail to  
[email protected], with the subject line: "Arbitration  
Opt Out." You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your  
name and address; (b) the date on which the device was  
purchased; (c) the device model name or model number; and  
(d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you  
have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on  
the device box; (ii) on the device information screen, which  
can be found under "Settings;" (iii) on a label on the back of  
the device beneath the battery, if the battery is removable;  
and (iv) on the outside of the device if the battery is not  
removable). Alternatively, you may opt out by calling  
1-888-987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the  
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in  
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees  
and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 ("Large Claim")  
shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
date of the first consumer purchaser's purchase of the  
device and providing the same information. These are the  
only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of  
this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out of this dispute  
resolution procedure will not affect your use of the device or  
its preloaded Software, and you will continue to enjoy the  
benefits of this license.  
16. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the  
entire agreement between you and Samsung Electronics Co.  
relating to the Software and supersedes all prior or  
contemporaneous oral or written communications, proposals  
and representations with respect to the Software or any other  
subject matter covered by this EULA. If any provision of this  
EULA is held to be void, invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the  
other provisions shall continue in full force and effect.  
[101212]  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
227  
Section 13: Samsung Product Registration  
Sign Up Now  
Customize your Samsung device experience  
• Activate product warranty  
• Access to a personalized My Samsung Mobile account  
• No monthly fees  
Get More  
• Latest info on promotions, events and special offers on related products  
• Review Samsung products and share your opinion  
• Great deals on downloads  
Register now at  
www.samsung.com/register  
Scan this code to go  
directly to the registration page.  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
Adobe PDF 186  
Airplane mode 116  
Alarm 174  
AllShare  
Definitions 165  
AllShare Play 165  
Configuring Settings 167  
Sharing Media 167  
AllShareCast Hub 166  
Amazon Kindle 168  
Application manager 127  
Applications  
Using the Camcorder 96  
Using the Camera 92  
World Clock 175  
AT&T Music  
Playlists 86  
AT&T Navigator 170  
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi 159  
B
Back key 31  
Battery  
charging 9  
Installing 8  
Low Battery Indicator 10  
Battery Use & Safety 200  
Bigger Font  
Setting 144  
Blocking Mode 123  
A
Abc mode 65  
About Device 146  
Accessory Settings 143  
Adding a New Contact  
Idle Screen 70  
Address Book 70  
Adding a New Contact 70  
Adding Pauses to Contact  
Numbers 72  
Copying an entry to the Phone 80  
Copying Entry to SIM Card 79  
Deleting Address Book Entries 80  
Dialing a Number 73  
Favorites 78  
Applications settings  
allow mock locations 146  
managing 128  
running services 128  
AT&T Code Scanner 168  
AT&T DriveMode 169  
AT&T Locker 170  
Finding an Address Book Entry 73  
Group Settings 77  
Managing Address Book Entries  
Service Dialing Numbers 80  
Using Contacts List 73  
Address Book Options 76  
Bluetooth  
Outgoing Headset Condition 60  
Sending contacts 162  
Bookmarks  
Adding Bookmarks 152  
C
Calculator 171  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Calendar 172  
Call Functions 46  
3-WayCalling(Multi-PartyCalling)  
Address Book 48  
Viewing All Calls 50  
Viewing Missed Calls 50  
Camcorder 96  
Camcorder Options 97  
Shooting Video 97  
Display  
icons 21  
Display / Touch-Screen 204  
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?  
Adjusting the Call Volume 53  
Answering a Call 48  
Call Back Missed Call 51  
Call Duration 53  
Call Log 49  
Call Waiting 58  
Correcting the Number 47  
Dialing a Recent Number 47  
Ending a Call 47  
International Call 46  
Making a Call 46  
Manual Pause Dialing 46  
Options During a Call 53  
Putting a Call on Hold 55  
Saving the Missed Call Number to  
Address Book 51  
Camcorder Options  
Camcorder Options after a Video is  
Taken 99  
Draft Messages 101  
E
Email 107  
Creating Additional Email  
Accounts 108  
Switching Between Email  
Accounts 108  
Synchronizing a Corporate Email  
Account 107  
Emergency Calls 205  
Entering Text 64  
Changing the Text Entry Mode 65  
Using 123Sym Mode 65  
Using Abc Mode 65  
Using Swype 67  
Using Symbol Mode 65  
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)  
Signals 192  
Camera 92  
Camera Options 93, 97  
Lock Screen Shortcut 130  
Taking Pictures 92  
Care and Maintenance 206  
Changing Your Settings 114  
Charging battery 9  
ChatON 112  
Children and Cell Phones 196  
Clock 130, 174  
Code Scanner 168  
Contacts 70  
Creating a Playlist 86  
Searching for a Number in  
Address Book 58  
Using the Speakerphone 56  
D
Developer Options 145  
Diary 181  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Google Maps 179  
Google Voice Typing 67  
Google voice typing settings 134  
GPS 204  
Group  
Adding an Entry 77  
Editing 78  
Removing an Entry 78  
Group Settings  
Editing a Caller Group 78  
Exit Window 151  
Information Ticker 130  
International Call 46  
F
Facebook 178  
Swpe Connect 138  
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)  
Regulations for Wireless Devices 211  
FCC Notice and Cautions 213  
Flipboard 178  
J
Joining Contacts 74  
K
Keyboard Settings 139  
Keyboard settings 135  
Keypad  
Changing Text Input 65  
Kies via Wi-Fi 122  
Kindle 168  
L
Landscape 64  
Language and keyboard settings  
select locale 134  
Live TV 84  
Location services settings 129  
Lock Screen  
Camera Quick Access 130  
Clock 130  
Dual Clock 130  
Font Size  
Changing 144  
G
Gallery 89  
viewing pictures 89  
viewing videos 90  
Gestures  
H
Health and Safety Information 192  
Home City  
Setting 130  
Home key 31  
Browse Image 33, 142  
Hotspots 117, 118, 119, 159  
Overview 32  
I
Screen Capture 34  
Shake to Update 33, 142  
Tilt to Zoom 33, 141  
Getting Started 6  
Setting Up Your Phone 6  
Voice mail 13  
Icons  
Application 24  
Indicator 21  
Icons, description 21  
In-Call Options 54  
Incognito 151  
Create Window 151  
Gmail 109  
Shortcuts 130  
Personalize Swype 138  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ticker 130  
Weather 130  
Signing into Email 107  
Signing into Gmail 109  
Spam 101  
AAC 84  
AAC+ 84  
eAAC+ 84  
M4A 84  
MP3 84  
MP4 84  
WMA 84  
Music Player  
adding music 87  
creating a playlist 86  
removing music 87  
Mute 54, 57  
My Files 182  
myAT&T 183  
N
Navigation 183  
command keys 31  
context-sensitive menus 32  
terms used 32  
M
Split View 105  
Maps 179  
Types of Messages 100  
MicroSD Card 7  
microSD card 44  
Installing 7  
Media Hub 28, 81  
Memory Card 44  
Memory Card Installation 7  
Menu  
Removing 8  
key 31  
microSDHC card 7, 44  
Menu Navigation 31  
Message Options 101  
Message Search 105  
Messaging  
Adding a Signature 107  
Block Unknown Senders 107  
Creating and Sending Text  
Messages 100  
Deleting a message 104  
Draft 101  
Gmail 109  
Locked 101  
Options 101  
Mini Diary 181  
Mobile Hotspots 116  
Mobile Video 88  
Mobile Web  
Entering Text in the Mobile Web  
Browser 150  
Navigating with the Mobile Web  
Using Bookmarks 151  
Mono  
Audio Setup 145  
Multimedia 81  
Music File Extensions  
3GP 84  
touch gestures 32  
Navigator 170  
NFC 164  
Scheduled Messages 101  
Settings 105  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Portable Wi-Fi hotspot 119  
Powering  
Off 10  
O
Operating Environment 209  
Other Important Safety Information  
P
Paper Artist 184  
password  
change 131  
PC Connections 163  
Phone  
Front View 15  
icons 21  
Rear View 17  
Side View 16  
Switching On/Off 10  
Pictures 89  
Sharing Multiple Pictures 91  
Sharing Pictures 90  
S Note 187  
S Pen Settings 142  
S Suggest 187  
Samsung Mobile Products and Recy-  
cling 202  
Privacy settings  
factory data reset 140  
Q
QWERTY keypad 64  
Screen Capture 34  
Security 130  
R
Ready2Go 11  
Reducing Exposure  
Hands-Free Kits and Other  
Accessories 195  
Reject List 52  
Reject list 52  
Reset  
factory data 140  
Responsible Listening 207  
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile device 212  
Ringtones 124  
Security settings  
device administration 132  
trusted credentials 133  
Service Dialing Numbers 80  
Settings 114  
Shortcuts 20  
SIM card  
installation 7  
Installing 6  
SIM card lock 131  
Smart Practices While Driving 199  
Smart Wi-Fi 159  
Snooze 175  
Software Update 147  
Gallery 89  
Sharing 90  
Play Books 185  
Play Music 186  
Play Store 186  
Pointer speed 139  
Polaris Office 186  
Polaris® Office 30, 186  
S
S Beam  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Spam  
Block Unknown Senders 107  
Manually Register a Number 107  
Register a Phrase 107  
Settings 107  
Symbol mode 65  
Rear View 17  
Side Views 16  
USB connection modes 163  
USB connections  
as a mass storage device 163  
USB settings  
as a mass storage device 163  
mass storage device 163  
USB Tethering 118  
USB utilities 117  
Using Bookmarks  
Deleting a Bookmark 153  
Editing Bookmarks 152  
T
T9 Trace 135  
Task manager 36  
Tethering 118  
Text Input  
Abc mode 65  
Methods 64  
Spam Messages 101  
Assigning 101  
Speakerphone Key 56  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certi-  
fication Information 197  
Standard Limited Warranty 215  
Stopwatch 176  
Storage 126  
Swap 55  
SWYPE  
entering text using 67  
Swype  
Cellular Data 137  
Connect 137  
Contribute Data Usage 137  
Preferences 136  
Updates 138  
symbol mode 65  
Timer 176  
Automatic Answering 60  
Touch Screen 11  
Lock/Unlock 11  
Transferring Large Files 90  
Travel Charger 9  
Using 9  
TTY Mode 62  
Twitter  
Personalize Swype 138  
V
Vibration 124  
Video Player 88  
Voice Mail  
Accessing 13  
From Another Phone 13  
Setup 13  
Voice Recorder 188  
Voice Talk 52, 190  
Volume 123  
U
UL Certified Travel Charger 203  
Understanding Your Phone 14  
Features of Your Phone 14  
Front View 15  
Swype Keypad Settings 136  
Swype Settings 69  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
W
Warranty Information 215  
Weather  
Setting 130  
Widgets  
Calculator 26  
Camera 26  
Email 27, 178  
Gmail 27, 178  
Settings 30, 188  
Video Player 30  
Voice Recorder 30, 188  
YouTube 31  
Wi-Fi  
using Kies via Wi-Fi 122  
Wi-Fi Direct 114, 158  
World Clock  
Deleting an Entry 176  
World clock 175  
Y
Yellowpages 191  
YouTube 190  
YPmobile (Yellow Pages mobile) 191  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

PYLE Audio TV Mount PSWLE59 User Guide
Quatech Network Card DSC 200 300 User Guide
RCA Clock Radio BRC10 Series User Guide
Ricoh All in One Printer Aficio 470W User Guide
Saitek Video Game Controller P990 User Guide
Samsung Indoor Furnishings WE357A0C User Guide
Samsung Refrigerator RB195ZA User Guide
Scag Power Equipment Lawn Mower GC STT CS User Guide
Sears Indoor Furnishings 04771772 3 User Guide
SECO LARM USA Door SK 1131 SQ User Guide